6 Protection PDF

Protection and
Substation Control
Contents Page
Local and Remote Control
Introduction ................................. 6/71
SINAUT LSA
Overview ...................................... 6/74
SINAUT LSA
Substation automation
distributed structure .................. 6/78
SINAUT LSA
Substation automation
centralized structure
(Enhanced RTU) .......................... 6/91
SINAUT LSA
Compact remote
terminal units .............................. 6/93
SICAM Overview ........................ 6/96
SICAM RTU Remote terminal
units (RTUs) ................................. 6/97
SICAM SAS
Substation automation ............ 6/108
SICAM PCC
Substation automation ............ 6/118
Contents Page Device dimensions .................. 6/125
General overview ........................ 6/2 Power Quality
Application hints ......................... 6/4 Introduction ............................... 6/131
Power System Protection Measuring and recording ...... 6/132
Introduction ................................... 6/8 Compensation systems
Introduction ............................... 6/146
Relay selection guide ................ 6/22
Passive compensation
Relay portraits ............................ 6/25 systems ...................................... 6/147
Typical protection schemes ..... 6/42 Active compensation
Protection coordination ............ 6/62 systems ...................................... 6/154
6
Protection and Substation Control
General Overview
General overview System control centers

IEC 60870-5-101
1
Three trends have emerged in the sphere
of substation secondary equipment: intelli- SICAM WinCC SICAM plusTools
gent electronic devices (IEDs), open com- GPS
Engineering,
munication and operation with a PC. Moni- Para-
Numerical relays and cumputerized substa- toring Automation meterizing
2 tion control are now state-of-the-art. and
control
The multitude of conventional, individual
devices prevalent in the past as well as Wire
comprehensive parallel wiring are being IEC 60 870-5-103 SIPROTEC-IEDs:
PROFIBUS RS485 – Relays
replaced by a small number of multifunc- O.F. – Bay control units
3 tional devices with serial connections. – Transducers
– etc.
One design for all applications

In this respect, Siemens offers a uniform,
universal technology for the entire func-
4 tional scope of secondary equipment, both
in the construction and connection of the
devices and in their operation and commu-
nication. This results in uniformity of de-
sign, coordinated interfaces and the same Fig. 1: The digital substation control system SICAM implements all of the control, measurement and automation
functions of a substation. Protection relays are connected serially
operating concept being established
5 throughout, whether in power system and
generator protection, in measurement and
recording systems, in substation control
and protection or in telecontrol.
All devices are highly compact and im-
6 mune to interference, and are therefore
also suitable for direct installation in
switchgear cells. Furthermore, all devices
and systems are largely self-monitoring,
which means that previously costly mainte-
nance can be reduced considerably.
7
“Complete technology from one partner“
The Protection and Substation Control Sys-
tems Division of the Siemens Power Trans-
mission and Distribution Group supplies
8 devices and systems for: Fig. 2a: Protection and control in HV GIS switchgear Fig. 2b: Protection and control in bay dedicated
kiosks of an EHV switchyard
■ Power System Protection
■ Substation Control
■ Remote Control (RTUs) Rationalization of operation by means of SCADA-like operation control
■ Measurement and Recording
and high-performance, uniformly operable PC tools
9 ■ Monitoring and Conditioning of Power Savings in terms of space by means of integration of many functions
Quality and costs into one unit and compact equipment design
This covers all of the measurement, con-
trol, automation and protection functions Simplified planning and by means of uniform design,
operational reliability coordinated interfaces and universally identical EMC
for substations*.
10 Furthermore, our activities cover: Efficient parameterization by means of PC tools with uniform operator
and operation interface
■ Consulting
■ Planning High levels of reliability by means of type-tested system technology, complete
■ Design and availability self-monitoring and the use of proven technology
■ Commissioning and Service – 20 years of practical experience with digital protection,
more than 150,000 devices in operation (1999)
This uniform technology ”all from one
source“ saves the user time and money in – 15 years of practical experience with substation
automation (SINAUT LSA and SICAM), over
the planning, assembly and operation of
1500 substations in operation (1999)
his substations.
*An exception is revenue metering. Meters are separate
products of our Metering Division. Fig. 3: For the user, “complete technology from one source” has many advantages
6/2 Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission and Distribution · 4th Edition
General Overview
Protection and substation automation 1
Substation automation Protection Power quality

SICAM/SINAUT LSA SIPROTEC SIMEAS/SIPCON 2
SINAUT LSA SICAM SAS Feeder protection SIMEAS R

overcurrent/overload relays Fault recorders
Substation automation Substation automation
7SJ5 and 7SJ6 (Oscillostores)
3
systems, centralized and systems, LAN-based
decentralized (Profibus)
Line protection SIMEAS Q, M, N

distance relays Power quality 4
7SA5 recorders
Remote terminal units SICAM PCC
Energy automation
based on PC and LAN
(Profibus) Line protection SIMEAS T
pilot protection relays
SICAM RTU 7SD5
Measuring
transducers
5
Enhanced RTU
6MD2010
Transformer protection SIPCON
Power conditioners
SINAUT LSA
7UT5 6
Compact unit
6MB552
Generator/motor protection
Minicompact unit
6MB553 7UM5
7
Busbar protection
7SS5 and 7VH8
Fig. 4: Siemens Protection and Substation Control comprises these systems and product ranges
8
System Protection The integration of additional protection Thus the on-line measurements and fault
and other functions, such as real-time data registered in the protective relays
Siemens offers a complete spectrum of
multifunctional, numerical relays for all
operational measurements, event and fault can be used for local and remote control 9
recording, all in one unit economizes on or can be transmitted via telephone mo-
applications in the field of network and
space, design and wiring costs. dem connections to the workplace of the
machine protection.
Setting and programming of the devices service engineer.
Uniform design and electromagnetic-inter-
can be performed through the integral, Siemens supplies individual devices as
ference-free construction in metal housings
plaintext, menu-guided operator display or well as complete protection systems in 10
with conventional connection terminals in by using the comfortable PC program DIG- factory finished cubicles. For complex ap-
accordance with public utility requirements SI for Windows*. plications, for example, in the field of extra-
assure simple system design and usage
Open serial interfaces, IEC 870-5-103-com- high-voltage transmission, type and design
just as with conventional relays.
pliant, allow free communication with high- test facilities are available together with an
Numerical measurement techniques en- er level control systems, including those extensive and comprehensive network
sure precise operation and necessitate less from other manufacturers. Connection to a model using the most modern simulation
maintenance thanks to their continuous Profibus substation LAN is optionally possible. and evaluation techniques.
self-monitoring capability.
* Windows is a registered product of Microsoft
Siemens Power Engineering Guide · Transmission and Distribution · 4th Edition 6/3
General Overview
Substation control Switchgear interlocking Advantages for the user

The digital substation control systems The digital interlocking system 8TK is used The concept of ”Complete technology
1 SICAM and SINAUT LSA provide all con- for important substations in particular with from one partner“ offers the user many
trol, measurement and automation func- multiple busbar arrangements. It prevents advantages:
tions (e.g. transformer tap changing) re- false switching and provides an additional ■ High-level security for his systems
quired by a switching station. They operate local bay control function which allows fail- and operational rationalization possibili-
with distributed intelligence. Commu- safe switching, even when the substation ties
2 nication between feeder-located devices control system is not available. Therefore
– powerful system solutions with the
and central unit is made via interference- the safety of operating personnel and
most modern technology
free fiber optic connections. equipment is considerabely enhanced.
Devices are extremely compact and can be – compliance with international standards
The 8TK system can be used as a stand-
built directly into medium and high-voltage ■ Integration in the overall system
alone interlocked control, or as back-up
switchgear. SIPROTEC-SICAM-SIMATIC
system together with the digital 6MB sub-
3 To input data, set and program the system, station control. ■ Space and cost savings
the unique PC programs SICAM PlusTools – integration of many functions into one
and LSA-TOOLS are available. Parameters unit and compact equipment packaging
Power Quality
and values are input at the central unit and ■ Simple planning and secure operation
(Measurement, recording and power
downloaded to the field devices, thus en- compensation) – unified design, matched interfaces
4 suring error-free and consistent data trans-
The SIMEAS product range offers equip-
and EMI security throughout
fer. ■ Rationalized programming and handling
ment for the superversion of power supply
The operator interface is menu-guided, – menu-guided PC Tools and unified
quality (harmonic content, distortion factor,
with SCADA comparable functions, that is, keypads and displays
peak loads, power factor, etc.), fault re-
with a level of convenience which was pre- ■ Fast, flexible mounting, reduced wiring
corders (Oscillostore), data logging printers
viously only available in a network control
5 center. Optional telecontrol functions can
and measurement transducers. ■ Simple, fast commissioning
Stored data can be transmitted manually or ■ Effective spare part stocking, high
be added to allow coupling of the system
automatically to PC evaluation systems flexibility
to one or more network control centers.
where it can be analyzed by intelligent pro- ■ High-level operational security and avail-
In contrast to conventional controls, digital ability
grams. Expert systems are also applied
technology saves enormously on space
here. This leads to rapid fault analysis and – continuous self-monitoring and proven
6 and wiring. SICAM and LSA systems are
valuable indicators for the improvement of technology:
subjected to full factory tests and are deliv-
network reliability. – 20 years digital relay experience (more
ered in fully functional condition.
For local bulk data storage and transmis- than 150,000 units in operation)
sion, the central processor DAKON can – 10 years of SINAUT LSA and SICAM
Remote control be installed at substation level. Data trans- substation control (more than 1500
7 Siemens remote control equipment mission circuits for analog telephone or systems in operation)
6MB55* and 6MD2010 fulfills all the clas- digital ISDN networks are incorporated as ■ Rapid problem solving
sic functions of remote measurement and standard. Connection to local or wide-area – comprehensive advice and fast re-
control. Furthermore, because of the pow- networks (LAN, WAN) is equally possible. sponse from local sales and
erful microprocessors with 32-bit technolo- We also have the SIMEAS T series of com- workshop facilities worldwide.
8 gy, they provide comprehensive data pre- pact and powerful measurement transduc-
processing, automation functions and bulk ers with analog and digital outputs.
storage of operational and fault informa- The SIPCON Power Conditioner solves
Application hints
tion. numerous system problems. It compen-
In the classic case, connections to the sates (for example) unbalanced loads or All named devices and systems for pro-
switchgear are made through coupling re- system voltage dips and suppresses tection, metering and control are designed
9 lays and transducers. This method allows system harmonics. It performs these func- to be used in the harsh environment of
an economically favorable solution when tions so that sensitive loads are assured of electrical substations, power plants and
modernizing or renewing the secondary suitable voltage quality at all times. In addi- the various industrial application areas.
systems in older installations. Alternatively, tion, the system ist also capable of elimi- When the devices were developed, special
especially for new installations, direct con- nating the perturbation produced by irregu- emphasis was placed on EMI. The devices
10 nection is also possible. Digital protection lar loads. The use of SIPCON can enable are in accordance with IEC 60 255 stand-
devices can be connected by serial links energy suppliers worldwide to provide the ards. Detailed information is contained in
through fiber-optic conductors. end consumer with distinctive quality of the device manuals.
In addition, the functions ”operating and supply.
Reliable operation of the devices is not
monitoring“ can be provided by the con-
affected by the usual interference from
nection of a PC, thus raising the telecontrol
the switchgear, even when the device is
unit to the level of a central station control
mounted directly in a low-voltage compart-
system. Using the facility of nodal func-
ment of a medium-voltage cubicle.
tions, it is also possible to build regional
control points so that several substations
can be controlled from one location.
Application Hints
It must, however, be ensured that the coils Electromagnetic compatibility

of auxiliary relays located on the same
panel, or in the same cubicle, are fitted EC Conformity declaration (CE mark): 1
with suitable spike quenching elements All Siemens protection and control prod-
(e.g. free-wheeling diodes). ucts recommended in this guide comply
When used in conjunction with switchgear with the EMC Directive 99/336/EEC of the
for 100 kV or above, all external connection Council of the European Community and
cables should be fitted with a screen further relevant IEC 255 standards on elec- 2
grounded at both ends and capable of car- tromagnetic compatibility.
rying currents. That means that the cross All products carry the CE mark.
section of the screen should be at least
4 mm2 for a single cable and 2.5 mm2 for
multiple cables in one cable duct. EMC tests; immunity (type tests)
All equipment proposed in this guide ■ Standards: 3
is built-up either in closed housings IEC 60255-22 (product standard)
(type 7XP20) or cubicles with protection EN 50082-2 (generic standard)
degree IP 51 according to IEC 60 529: ■ High frequency
■ Protected against access to dangerous IEC 60255-22-1 class III
parts with a wire – 2.5 kV (peak); 4
■ Sealed against dust 1 MHz; τ = 15 µs;
400 shots/s;
■ Protected against dripping water
duration 2 s
■ Electrostatic discharge
Climatic conditions: IEC 60255-22-2 class III
■ Permissible temperature during and EN 61000-4-2 class III 5
service – 4 kV contact discharge;
–5 °C to +55 °C 8 kV air discharge;
permissible temperature during storage both polarities;
–25 °C to +55 °C 150 pF; Ri = 330 Ohm
permissible temperature during transport ■ Radio-frequency electromagnetic field, 6
–25 °C to +70 °C nonmodulated;
Storage and transport with standard IEC 60255-22-3 (report) class III
Fig. 5: Installation of the numerical protection in the
works packaging door of the low-voltage section of medium-voltage cell – 10 V/m; 27 MHz to 500 MHz
■ Permissible humidity ■ Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,
Mean value per year ≤ 75% relative hu- amplitude-modulated;
7
midity; on 30 days per year 95% relative Vibration and shock during transport ENV 50140, class III
humidity; Condensation not permissible – 10 V/m; 80 MHz to 1000 MHz, 80%;
■ Standards:
We recommend that units be installed 1 kHz; AM
IEC 60255-21and IEC 60068-2
such that they are not subjected to direct ■ Radio-frequency electromagnetic field,
■ Vibration
sunlight, nor to large temperature fluctua- pulse-modulated;
tions which may give rise to condensation. – sinusoidal ENV 50140/ENV 50204, class III 8
IEC 60255-21-1, class 2 – 10 V/m; 900 MHz;
– 5 Hz to 8 Hz: repetition frequency 200 Hz;
Mechanical stress ± 7.5 mm amplitude; duty cycle 50%
Vibration and shock during operation IEC 60068-2-6 ■ Fast transients
■ Standards:
– 8 Hz to 150 Hz: 2 g acceleration IEC 60255-22-4 and EN 61000-4-4, 9
sweep rate 1 octave/min class III
IEC 60255-21 and IEC 60068-2 20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes – 2 kV; 5/50 ns; 5 kHz;
■ Vibration ■ Shock burst length 15 ms; repetition rate
– sinusoidal IEC 60255 -21-2, class 1 300 ms; both polarities;
IEC 60255-21-1, class 1 IEC 60068 -2-27 Ri = 50 Ohm; duration 1 min
– 10 Hz to 60 Hz: ■ Conducted disturbances induced by 10
± 0.035 mm amplitude; Insulation tests
radio-frequency fields HF,
IEC 60068-2-6 amplitude-modulated
■ Standards: ENV 50141, class III
– 60 Hz to 150 Hz:
0.5 g acceleration IEC 60255-5 – 10 V; 150 kHz to 80 MHz;
sweep rate 10 octaves/min – High-voltage test (routine test) 80%; 1kHz; AM
20 cycles in 3 orthogonal axes 2 kV (rms), 50 Hz ■ Power-frequency magnetic field
– Impulse voltage test (type test) EN 61000-4-8, class IV
all circuits, class III – 30 A/m continuous;
5 kV (peak); 1.2/50 µs; 0.5 J; 3 positive 300 A/m for 3 s; 50 Hz
and 3 negative shots at intervals of 5 s
Application Hints
EMC tests; emission (type tests) Cores for revenue metering The required c.t. accuracy-limiting factor
KALF can be determined by calculation,
■ Standard: In this case, class 0.2 M is normally
1 EN 50081-2 (generic standard) required.
as shown in Fig. 6.
■ Interference field strength CISPR 11, The overdimensioning factor KOF depends
EN 55011, class A Protection cores: on the type of relay and the primary d.c.
The size of the protection core depends time constant. For the normal case, with
– 30 MHz to 1000 MHz
mainly on the maximum short-circuit cur- short-circuit time constants lower than
■ Conducted interference voltage, 100 ms, the necessary value for K*ALF can
2 aux. voltage CISPR 22, EN 55022, rent and the total burden (internal c.t. bur-
be taken from the table in Fig. 9.
class B den, plus burden of connecting leads, plus
relay burden). The recommended values are based on
– 150 kHz to 30 MHz extensive type tests.
Further, an overdimensioning factor has to
be considered to cover the influence of the C.t. design according to BS 3938
Instrument transformers
3 d.c. component in the short-circuit current.
Instrument transformers must comply In this case the c.t. is defined by the knee-
In general, an accuracy of 1% (class 5 P) is point voltage UKN and the internal second-
with the applicable IEC recommendations specified. The accuracy limiting factor KALF
IEC 60044, formerly IEC 60185 (c.t.) and ary resistance Ri.
should normally be designed so that The design values according to IEC 60 185
186 (p.t.), ANSI/IEEE C57.13 or other com- at least the maximum short-circuit current
parable standards. can be approximately transferred into the
can be transmitted without saturation BS standard definition by the following
4 (d.c. component not considered). formula:
Potential transformers This results, as a rule, in rated accuracy
Potential transformers (p.t.) in single- or limiting factors of 10 or 20 dependent on (RNC + Ri) • I2N • KALF
double-pole design for all primary voltages the rated burden of the c.t. in relation to UKN =
have single or dual secondary windings of the connected burden. A typical specifica- 1.3
5 100, 110 or 120 V/ 3, with output ratings tion for protection cores for distribution I2N = Nominal secondary current
between 10 and 300 VA, and accuracies feeders is 5P10, 15 VA or 5P20, 10 VA. Example:
of 0.2, 0.5 or 1% to suit the particular The requirements for protective current IEC 185 : 600/1, 15 VA, 5P10, Ri = 4 Ohm
application. Primary BIL values are select- transformers for transient performance are (15 + 4) • 1 • 10
ed to match those of the associated specified in IEC 60044-6. The recom- BS : UKN = = 146 V
1.3
6 switchgear. mended calculation procedure for satura- Ri = 4 Ohm
tion-free design, however, leads to very
high c.t. dimensions. Fig. 7: BS c.t. definition
Current transformers In many practical cases, the c.t.s cannot
Current transformers (c.t.) are usually of be designed to avoid saturation under all C.t. design
the single-ratio type with wound or bar- circumstances because of cost and space according to ANSI/IEEE C 57.13
7 type primaries of adequate thermal rating. reasons, particularly with metal-enclosed Class C of this standard defines the c.t. by
Single, dual or triple secondary windings of switchgear. its secondary terminal voltage at 20 times
1 or 5 A are standard. The Siemens relays are therefore designed nominal current, for which the ratio error
1 A rating however should be preferred, to tolerate c.t. saturation to a large extent. shall not exceed 10%. Standard classes
particularly in HV and EHV stations, to re- The numerical relays proposed in this are C100, C200, C400 and C800 for 5 A
duce the burden of the connecting leads. guide are particularly stable in this case nominal secondary current.
8 Output power (rated burden in VA), accura- due to their integral saturation detection This terminal voltage can be approximately
cy and saturation characteristics (accuracy function. calculated from the IEC data as follows:
limiting factor) of the cores and secondary
windings must meet the particular applica-
tion. RBC + Ri
The c.t. classification code of IEC is used KALF > K*ALF KALF
9 RBN + Ri Vs.t. max = 20 x 5 A x RBN •
in the following: 20
KALF : Rated c.t. accuracy limiting factor
Measuring cores with:
K*ALF : Effective c.t. accuracy
They are normally specified with 0.5% or limiting factor RBN = PBN and INsec = 5 A , we get
1.0% accuracy (class 0.5 M or 1.0 M), and RBN : Rated burden resistance INsec2
10 an accuracy limiting factor of 5 or 10. RBC : Connected burden
The required output power (rated burden) Ri : Internal c.t. burden (resistance
must be higher than the actually connect- Vs.t. max =
PBN • KALF
of the c.t. secondary winding)
ed burden. Typical values are 5, 10, 15 VA. 5
Higher values are normally not necessary with:
Iscc.max.
when only electronic meters and recorders K*ALF > KOF Example:
are connected. IN IEC 185 : 600/5, 25 VA, 5P20,
A typical specification could be: 0.5 M 10, Iscc.max. = Maximum short-circuit current 25 • 20
15 VA. IN = Rated primary c.t. current ANSI C57.13: Vs.t. max = =
5
KOF = Overdimensioning factor = 100, i.e. class C100
Fig. 6: C.t. dimensioning formulae Fig. 8: ANSI c.t. definition
Application Hints
Minimum K*ALF Example: Stability-verification of the

Relay type numerical busbar protection 7SS50 1
Given case:
o/c protection IHigh set point
7SJ511, 512, 551, = , at least 20
7SJ60, 61, 62, 63
IN
2
Transformer Iscc. max. (internal fault) [K*ALF . UN . IN](High voltage)
differential protection = and 1 < <2
7UT51 IN 2 [K*ALF . UN . IN](Low voltage)
600/1 l = 50 m
7SS5 3
Line differential Iscc. max. (internal fault) [K*ALF . IN](line-end 1) 5 P 10, A = 6 mm2
(fiber-optic) protection = and 1 < <3 15 VA,
7SD511/512
IN 3 [K*ALF . IN](line-end 2) Ri = 4 Ohm
I scc.max. = 30 kA
Line differential Iscc. max. (internal fault) K*

4
(pilot wire) protection = and 3 < ALF (line-end 1) < 4
7SD502/503/600
IN 4 K*ALF (line-end 2) 3
Iscc.max.
= 30,000 = 50
Numerical busbar I
IN 600 5
protection (low impe- = 1 scc. max. (outflowing current for ext. fault)
dance type) 7SS5 2 IN
According to Fig. 9:
Distance protection
7SA511, 7SA513, = a
Iscc. max. (close-in fault) TN < 50 ms:
K*ALF >
1
50 = 25 6
IN a=2 2
7SA522
and
Iscc. max. (line-end fault) TN < 100 ms: 15 VA
RBN = = 15 Ohm; 7
= 10 1 A2
IN a = 3 for 7SA511
a = 2 for 7SA513 1.5 VA
and 7SA522
RRelay = = 1.5 Ohm
1 A2
8
Fig. 9: Required effective accuracy limiting factor K*ALF 2 0.0179 50
Rl = = 0.3 Ohm
Relay burden Burden of the connection leads 6
The c.t. burdens of the numerical relays of The resistance of the current loop from
Siemens are below 0.1 VA and can there- the c.t. to the relay has to be considered:
fore be neglected for a practical estimation. RBC = Rl + RRelay = 9
Exceptions are the busbar protection 7SS50
= 0.3 + 1.5 = 1.8 Ohm
(1.5 VA) and the pilot wire relays 7SD502, 2 ρ l
7SD600 (4 VA) and 7SD503 (3 VA + 9 VA per Rl = Ohm
A
100 Ohm pilot wire resistance).
Intermediate c.t.s are normally no longer
applicable as the ratio adaption for busbar l = single conductor length KALF >
1.8 + 4
25 = 7.6
10
and transformer protection is numerically 15 + 4
performed in the relay. from the c.t. to the relay in m.
Analog static relays in gereral also have
burdens below about 1 VA. Result:
Mechanical relays, however, have a much Specific resistance:
The rated KALF-factor (10) is higher
Ohm mm2
higher burden, up to the order of 10 VA. ρ = 0.0179 m (copper wires) than the calculated value (7.6).
This has to be considered when older re- Therefore, the stability criterium is
lays are connected to the same c.t. circuit. A = conductor cross section
fulfilled.
In any case, the relevant relay manuals in mm2
should always be consulted for the actual
burden values. Fig. 10 Fig. 11
Power System Protection
Introduction
Introduction SIPROTEC 3 SIPROTEC 4
1
Siemens is one of the world’s leading sup-
pliers of protective equipment for power
systems.
Thousands of our relays ensure first-class
performance in transmission and distribu-
2 tion networks on all voltage levels, all over
the world, in countries of tropical heat or
arctic frost.
For many years, Siemens has also signifi-
cantly influenced the development of pro-
3 tection technology.
■ In 1976, the first minicomputer (process
computer)-based protection system was
commissioned: A total of 10 systems
for 110/20 kV substations were supplied
4 and are still operating satisfactorily today.
■ Since 1985, we have been the first to
manufacture a range of fully numerical Fig. 12: Numerical relay ranges of Siemens
relays with standardized communication
interfaces.
Today, Siemens offers a complete pro-
5 gram of protective relays for all applica- State of the art
tions including numerical busbar protec- Mechanical and solid-state (static) relays
tion. have been almost completely phased out
To date (1999), more than 150,000 numer- of our production because numerical relays
ical protection relays from Siemens are are now preferred by the users due to
6 providing successful service, as stand- their decisive advantages:
alone devices in traditional systems or
■ Compact design and lower cost due to
as components of coordinated protec-
tion and substation control. integration of many functions into one
Meanwhile, the innovative SIPROTEC 4 relay
series has been launched, incorporating ■ High availability even with less mainte-
7 the many years of operational experi- nance due to integral self-monitoring
ence with thousands of relays, together ■ No drift (aging) of measuring characteris-
with users’ requirements (power author- tics due to fully numerical processing
ity recommendations). ■ High measuring accuracy due to digital
filtering and optimized measuring algo-
rithms
8 ■ Many integrated add-on functions,
for example, for load-monitoring and
event/fault recording
■ Local operation keypad and display de-
signed to modern ergonomic criteria
9 ■ Easy and secure read-out of information
via serial interfaces with a PC, locally or
remotely
■ Possibility to communicate with higher-
level control systems using standardized
10 protocols (open communication)
Introduction
52
1
21 67N FL 79 25 SM ER FR BM
2
85
3
Serial link to station – or personal computer
to remote line end kA,
kV,
Hz, 01.10.93
21 Distance protection MW,
67N Directional ground-fault protection MVAr, 4
Load monitor MVA,
FL Distance-to-fault locator
79 Autoreclosure Fault report
25 Synchro-check Fault record
85 Carrier interface (teleprotection) 5
SM Self-monitoring Relay monitor
ER Event recording
Breaker monitor
FR Fault recording
BM Breaker monitor Supervisory control
6
Fig. 13: Numerical relays, increased information availability
Modern protection management All relays can stand fully alone. Thus, the Measuring included 7
traditional protection concept of separate
All the functions, for example, of a line pro- For many applications, the protective-current
main and alternate protection as well as
tection scheme can be incorporated in one transformer accuracy is sufficient for oper-
the external connection to the switchyard
unit: ational measuring. The additional mea-
remain unchanged.
■ Distance protection with associated suring c.t. was more for protection of
add-on and monitoring functions measuring instruments under system fault 8
■ Universal teleprotection interface
”One feeder, one relay“ concept conditions. Due to the low thermal with-
stand ability of the measuring instruments,
■ Autoreclose and synchronism check Analog protection schemes have been en-
they could not be connected to the protec-
gineered and assembled from individual
tion c.t.. Consequently, additional measur-
Protection-related information can be relays. Interwiring between these relays
ing c.t.s and measuring instruments are
called up on-line or off-line, such as: and scheme testing has been carried out
now only necessary where high accuracy 9
manually in the workshop.
■ Distance to fault is required, e.g. for revenue metering.
■ Fault currents and voltages
Data sharing now allows for the integration
of several protection and protection related
■ Relay operation data (fault detector pick-
tasks into one single numerical relay. Only
up, operating times etc.)
a few external devices may be required for 10
■ Set values completion of the total scheme. This has
■ Line load data (kV, A, MW, kVAr) significantly lowered the costs of engineer-
To fulfill vital protection redundancy require- ing, assembly, panel wiring, testing and
ments, only those functions which are in- commissioning. Scheme failure probability
terdependent and directly associated with has also been lowered.
each other are integrated in the same unit. Engineering has moved from schematic
For back-up protection, one or more addi- diagrams towards a parameter definition
tional units have to be provided. procedure. The documentation is provided
by the relay itself. Free allocation of LED
operation indicators and output contacts
provides more application design flexibility.
Introduction
On-line remote data exchange

A powerful serial data link provides for
1 interrogation of digitized measured values Personal computer Recording
and other information stored in the pro- DIGSI
tection units, for printout and further
processing at the substation or system
control level.
2 In the opposite direction, settings may be
altered or test routines initiated from a re-
mote control center. Assigning
For greater distances, especially in outdoor
switchyards, fiber-optic cables are prefera-
bly used. This technique has the advantage
3 that it is totally unaffected by electromag- Protection Laptop
netic interference.
Off-line dialog with numerical relays DIGSI

4 A simple built-in operator panel which Recording and
requires no special software knowledge or confirmation
codeword tables is used for parameter
input and readout.
This allows operator dialog with the protec-
tion relay. Answers appear largely in plain-
5 text on the display of the operator panel. Fig. 14: PC-aided setting procedure
Dialog is divided into three main phases:
■ Input, alternation and readout of settings
■ Testing the functions of the protection to remote control
device and System level
6 ■ Readout of relay operation data for the
three last system faults and the autore-
close counter. Substation Coordinated
level
protection & control
Modern system protection Modem
7 management (option)
A more versatile notebook PC may be ERTU RTU
used for upgraded protection manage- Data
ment.
concentrator
The MS Windows-compatible relay opera-
8 tion program DIGSI is available for entering
and readout of setpoints and archiving of Bay level
protection data.
The relays may be set in 2 steps. First, all 52
relay settings are prepared in the office
9 with the aid of a local PC and stored on a
floppy or the hard disk. At site, the set- Relay Control
tings can then be downloaded from a PC
into the relay. The relay confirms the set-
tings and thus provides an unquestionable
record.
10 Vice versa, after a system fault, the relay Fig. 15: Communication options
memory can be uploaded to a PC, and
comprehensive fault analysis can then take
place in the engineer’s office.
Alternatively, the total relay dialog can be
guided from any remote location through a
modem-telephone connection (Fig. 15).
Introduction
Relay data management

Analog-distribution-type relays have some
20–30 setpoints. If we consider a power
Setpoints Relay operations 1
system with about 500 relays, then the
number adds up to 10,000 settings. This 300 faults p. a.
requires considerable expenditure in set- 10 000 1200 approx. 6,000 km
ting the relays and filing retrieval setpoints. setpoints flags OHL (fault rate:
A personal computer-aided man-machine
system
1 p. a. 5 p. a. and 100 km) 2
dialog and archiving program, e.g. DIGSI, approx.
assists the relay engineer in data filing and 500
retrieval. The program files all settings system
200 relays
systematically in substation-feeder-relay
order. setpoints
3
Corrective rather than preventive 1
20 sub 4
maintenance
setpoints flags
Numerical relays monitor their own hard-
ware and software. Exhaustive self-moni- 4
toring and failure diagnostic routines are 1 bay
not restricted to the protective relay itself, bay
OH-Line
but are methodically carried through from
current transformer circuits to tripping re-
lay coils.
Equipment failures and faults in the c.t. cir- Fig. 16: System-wide setting and relay operation library
5
cuits are immediately reported and the pro-
tective relay blocked.
Thus, the service personnel are now able
to correct the failure upon occurrence, re-
sulting in a significantly upgraded availability 6
of the protection system.
1000 Parameter
D
1000 1100
ParameterLine data
Adaptive relaying
C
Numerical relays now offer secure, con- 1100 Line data O/C Phase settings
venient and comprehensive matching to
1000 1200
Parameter
B
7
changing conditions. Matching may be initi- 1000 1100 Line data O/C Phase settings
1200
Parameter
ated either by the relay’s own intelligence 1500
A O/C Earth settings
or from the outside world via contacts or 1100 Line data O/C Phase settings
1200 1500 O/C EarthFault
2800 settings
Recording
serial telegrams. Modern numerical relays
contain a number of parameter sets that 1200 O/C PhaseO/C
1500 settings
2800 Earth settings 8
can be pretested during commissioning of Fault
3900 Recording
Breaker Fall
the scheme (Fig. 17). One set is normally 1500 O/C Ground settings
operative. Transfer to the other sets can be 2800 Fault Recording
3900 Breaker Fall
controlled via binary inputs or serial data
link. There are a number of applications for 2800 Fault recording
3900 Breaker Fall
which multiple setting groups can upgrade 9
the scheme performance, e.g. 3900 Breaker fail
a) for use as a voltage-dependent control
of o/c relay pickup values to overcome
alternator fault current decrement to be-
low normal load current when the AVR 10
is not in automatic operation. Fig. 17: Alternate parameter groups
b) for maintaining short operation times
with lower fault currents, e.g. automatic
change of settings if one supply trans- d) for autoreclose programs, i.e. instanta-
former is taken out of service. neous operation for first trip and delayed
c) for “switch-onto-fault” protection to pro- operation after unsuccessful reclosure.
vide shorter time settings when energiz- e) for cold load pick-up problems where
ing a circuit after maintenance. high starting currents may cause relay
The normal settings can be restored operation.
automatically after a time delay. f) for ”ring open“ or ”ring closed“ operation.
Relay Design and Operation
Mode of operation PC interface

Numerical protection relays operate on the LSA interface
1 basis of numerical measuring principles.
The analog measured values of current and
voltage are decoupled galvanically from the Meas. Input filter V.24 FO Input/ Binary
plant secondary circuits via input transduc- inputs output inputs
Serial ports
ers (Fig. 18). After analog filtering, the
Interfaces
2 sampling and the analog-to-digital conver-
sion take place. The sampling rate is, de-
pending on the different protection princi-
ples, between 12 and 20 samples per Alarm
period. With certain devices (e.g. generator Current Amplifier relay
protection) a continuous adjustment of the inputs
3 sampling rate takes place depending on (100 x /N,
1 s)
the actual system frequency.
The protection principle is based on a cy- Com-
clic calculation algorithm, utilizing the sam- mand
pled current and voltage analog measured relay
4 values. The fault detections determined by Voltage A/D Processor Memory:
this process must be established in several inputs converter system RAM Input/ LED
sequential calculations before protection (140 V output
contin- EEPROM dis-
reactions can follow. 0001 units plays
uous) 0101 EPROM
A trip command is transferred to the com- 0011
mand relay by the processor, utilizing a
5 dual channel control.
The numerical protection concept offers a 100 V/1 A, 10 V digital Input/output
variety of advantages, especially with re- 5 A analog analog contacts
gard to higher security, reliability and user
Fig. 18: Block diagram of numerical protection
friendliness, such as:
6 ■ High measurement accuracy:
The high ultilization of adaptive algo-
rithms produce accurate results even Plausibility check of input quantities
during problematic conditions e.g. iL1 + iL2 + iL3 = iE
■ Good long-term stability: uL1 + uL2 + uL3 = uE
7 Due to the digital mode of operation,
drift phenomena at components due to
ageing do not lead to changes in accura-
cy of measurement or time delays Check of analog-to-digital conversion
■ Security against over and underfunction A by comparison with
With this concept, the danger of an unde- converted reference quantities
8 tected error in the device causing protec- D
tion failure in the event of a network fault
is clearly reduced when compared to con-
ventional protection technology. Cyclical Hardware and software monitoring of
and preventive maintenance services have Micro- the microprocessor system incl. memory,
9 therefore become largely obsolete. processor e.g. by watchdog and
system cyclic memory checks
The integrated self-monitoring system
(Fig. 19) encompasses the following areas:
– Analog inputs
– Microprocessor system Relay Monitoring of the tripping relays
10 – Command relays. operated via dual channels
Tripping check or test reclosure by local

or remote operation (not automatic)
Fig. 19: Self-monitoring system
Implemented Functions
SIOPROTEC relays are available with a
variety of protective functions. See relay 1
charts (page 6/20 and following).
The high processing power of modern nu-
merical devices allow further integration of
non-protective add-on functions.
2
The question as to whether separate or
combined relays should be used for pro-
tection and control cannot be uniformly an-
swered. In transmission type substations,
separation into independent hardware units
is still preferred, whereas on the distribu- 3
tion level a trend towards higher function
integration can be observed. Here, com-
bined feeder relays for protection, monitor-
ing and control are on the march (Fig. 20).
Most of the relays of this guide are stand- 4
alone protection relays. The exception in
the SIPROTEC 3 series is the distribution
feeder relay 7SJ531 that also integrates
control functions. Per feeder, only one re-
lay package ist needed in this case leading
to a considerable reduction in space und 5
wiring. Fig. 20: Switchgear with numerical relay (7SJ62) Switchgear with combined protection
and traditional control and control relay (7SJ63)
With the new SIPROTEC 4 series (types
7SJ61, 62 and 63), Siemens supports both
stand-alone and combined solutions on the
basis of a single hardware and software The following solutions are available within ■ Combined feeder relays for protection, 6
platform. The user can decide within wide one relay family: monitoring and control
limits on the configuration of the control ■ Separate control and protection relays Mixed use of the different relay types is
and protection functions in the feeder, ■ Protection relays including remote con- readily possible on account of the uniform
without compromising the reliability of the trol of the feeder breaker via the serial operation and communication procedures.
protection functions (Fig. 21). communication link 7
7SJ61/ 7SJ62/63
Busbar 62/63
52
Local/Remote control PLC logic Vf (option) Directional (option)
8
Commands/Feedback indications
Trip circuit Fault locator Rotating field
supervision Lockout 810/U 59 27 monitoring
Motor & 21FL
control 74TC 86 47
(only 7SJ63) 9
HMI Communica- Fault Metering values V, Watts,
tions module recording Vars f.p.f.
RS23/485 I2 limit values
fiber optic
IEC 60 870-5-103 Metered power Calculated
values pulses
PROFIBUS FMS
10
Motor protection (option)
Starting time 67 67N
Inrush
50 51 50N 51N 46 49 restrain 50BF
37 48 66/86
Breaker Directional ground-
failure Start fault detection (option)
Auto reclosing protection 14 Locked inhibit
79M rotor
60N 51N 67 64
Fig. 21: SIPROTEC 4 relays 7SJ61/62/63, implemented function
Integration of relays in the substation

automation
DIGSI 4 DIGSI 4
1 Basically, Siemens numerical relays
are all equipped with an interface to IEC Telephone
60870-5-103 for open communication with SICAM
connection
substation control systems either from SAS
Siemens (SINAUT LSA or SICAM, see
PROFIBUS FMS
2 page 6/71 ff) or of any other supplier.
The relays of the newer SIPROTEC 4 Modem IEC 60870-5-103
series, however, are even more flexible
and equipped with communication options. DIGSI 4
SIPROTEC 4 relays may also be connected
3 to the SINAUT LSA system or to a system
of another supplier via IEC 60870-5-103.
But, SICAM 4 relays were originally de-
signed as components of the new SICAM
substation automation system, and their IEC 60870-5-103
common use offers the most technical and
4 cost benefits.
SIPROTEC 4 protection and SICAM station Fig. 22: SIPROTEC 4 relays, communication options
control, which is based on SIMATIC, are of
uniform design, and communication is based
on the Profibus standard.
5 SIPROTEC 4 relays can in this case be
connected to the Profibus substation LAN
of the SICAM system via one serial inter- 1
face. Through a second serial interface, 1
e.g. IEC 60 870-5-103, the relay can sepa-
6 rately communicate with a remote PC via a 2
modem-telephone line (Fig. 22).
2
3 3
Local relay operation
All operator actions can be executed and 4
7 information displayed on an integrated user 4 5
interface.
6 6
Many advantages are already to be found
on the clear and user-friendly front panel: 7
7
■ Positioning and grouping of the keys
8 supports the natural operating process
(ergonomic design) 1 Large illuminated display 4 Control (7SJ61/62 6 Freely programmable
■ Large non-reflective back-lit display 2 Cursor keys uses function keys) function keys
■ Programmable (freely assignable) LEDs 3 LED with reset key 5 Key switches 7 Numerical keypad
for important messages
9 ■ Arrows arrangement of the keys for Fig. 23: Front view of the protection relay 7SJ62 Fig. 24: Front view of the combined protection,
easy navigation in the function tree monitoring and control relay 7SJ63
■ Operator-friendly input of the setting val-
ues via the numeric keys or with a PC
by using the operating program DIGSI 4
■ Command input protected by key lock
10 (6MD63/7SJ63 only) or password
■ Four programmable keys for frequently
used functions >at the press of a but-
ton<
DIGSI 4 the PC program for operating

SIPROTEC 4 relays
For the user, DIGSI is synonymous with 1
convenient, user-friendly parameterizing
and operation of digital protection relays.
DIGSI 4 is a logical innovation for operation
of protection and bay control units of the
SIPROTEC 4 family. 2
The PC operating program DIGSI 4 is the
human-machine interface between the
user and the SIPROTEC 4 units. It features
modern, intuitive operating procedures.
With DIGSI 4, the SIPROTEC 4 units ca be
configured and queried. 3
■ The interface provides you only with
what is really necessary, irrespective of
which unit you are currently configuring. Fig. 25: Substation manager for managing of substation and device data
■ Contextual menus for every situation
provide you with made-to-measure func- 4
tionality – searching through menu
hierarchies is a thing of the past.
■ Explorer – operation on the MS Win-
dows 95® Standard – shows the options
in logically structured form. 5
■ Even with marshalling, you have the
overall picture – a matrix shows you at a
glance, for example, which LEDs are
linked to which protection control
function(s). It just takes a click with the
mouse to establish these links by a 6
fingertip.
■ Thus, you can also use the PC to link up
with the relay via star coupler or channel
switch, as well via the PROFIBUS® of a
substation control system. The integrat- 7
ed administrating system ensures clear
addressing of the feeders and relays of a
substation.
■ Access authorization by means of pass-
words protects the individual functions,
such as for example parameterizing, 8
commissioning and control, from unau-
thorized access. Fig. 26: Function range
■ When configuring the operator environ-
ment and interfaces, we have attached
importance to continuity with the SICAM 9
automation system. This means that you
can readily use DIGSI on the station con-
trol level in conjunction with SICAM.
Thus, the way is open to the SIMATIC
automation world.
10
Fig. 27: Range of operational measured values
DIGSI 4 matrix
The DIGSI 4 matrix allows the user to see
1 the overall view of the relay configuration
at a glance. For example, you can display
all the LEDs that are linked to binary inputs
or show external signals that are connect-
ed to the relay. And with one click of
2 the button, connections can be switched
(Fig. 28).
Display editor
A display editor is available to design the
3 display on SIPROTEC 4 units. The prede-
fined symbol sets can be expanded to suit
the user. The drawing of a one-line dia-
gram is extremely simple. Load monitoring
values (analog values) can be placed where Fig. 28: DIGSI 4 allocation matrix
required (Fig. 29).
4
Commissioning
Special attention has been paid to commis-
sioning. All binary inputs and outputs can
5 be read and set directly. This can simplify
the wire checking process significantly for
the user.
CFC: Planning instead of programming

6 logic
With the help of the graphical CFC (Contin-
uous Function Chart)Tool, you can config-
ure interlocks and switching sequences
simply by drawing the logic sequences; no
7 special knowledge of software is required.
Logical elements such as AND, OR and
time elements are available (Fig. 30) .
Hardware and software platform

8 ■ Pentium 133 MHz or above, with at
least 32 Mbytes RAM Fig. 29: Display Editor
■ DIGSI requires about 200 Mbytes hard-
disk space
■ Additional hard-disk space per installed
9 protection device 2 Mbytes
■ One free serial interface to the protec-
tion device (COM 1 to COM 4)
■ One CD ROM drive (required for in-
stallation)
■ WINDOWS 95/98 or NT 4
10
Fig. 30: CFC logic with module library
Operation of SIPROTEC 3 Relays

Most of the Siemens numerical relays be-
long to the series SIPROTEC 3. (Only the 1
distribution protection relays 7SJ61/62,
the combined protection and control relay
7SJ63 and the line protection 7SA522 are
presently available in the version SIPRO-
TEC 4). 2
Both relay series are widely compatible and
can be used together in protection and con-
trol systems. SIPROTEC 3 relays however
are not applicable with PROFIBUS but only
with the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
standard. 3
The operation of SIPROTEC 3 and 4 relays
is very similar. Some novel features of the
PC operating program DIGSI 4 like the CFC
function and the graphical setting matrix
are however not contained in DIGSI 3. 4
Operation of SIPROTEC 3 relays via inte- Fig. 31: Operation of the protection relays using PC and DIGSI 3 software program
gral key pad and LCD display:
Each parameter can be accessed and al-
tered via the integrated operator panel or a
5
PC connected to the front side serial com-
munication interface.
The setting values can be accessed directly
via 4-digit addresses or by paging through
the menu. The display appears on an alpha- 6
numeric LCD display with 2 lines with
16 characters per line.
Also the rear side IEC 60870-5-103 com-
patible serial interface can be used for the
relay dialog with a PC, when not occupied 7
for the connection to a substation automa-
tion system. This rear side interface is in
particular used for remote relay communi-
cation with a PC (see page 6/19).
Most relays allow for the storage of several
setting groups (in general 4) which can be Fig. 32: Parameterization using DIGSI 3
8
activated via binary relay input, serial inter-
face or operator panel.
Binary inputs, alarm contact outputs, indi- DIGSI 3 the PC program for operating ■ PC 386 SX or above, with at least
cating LEDs and command output relays SIPROTEC 3 relays 4 Mbytes Ram
can be freely assigned to the internal relay For setting of SIPROTEC 3 relays, the ■ 10 Mbytes hard-disc space for DIGSI 3 9
functions. DIGSI 3 version is applicable. (Figs. 31 and ■ 2 to 3 Mbytes additional hard-disc space
32). It is a WINDOWS-based program that per installed protection device
allows comfortable user-guided relay set- ■ One free serial interface to the protec-
ting, load monitoring and readout of stored tion device (COM 1 to COM 4)
fault reports, including oscillographic fault ■ One floppy disc drive 3.5", high density 10
records. It is also a valuable tool for com- with 1.44 Mbytes or CD ROM drive for
missioning as it allows an online overview program installation
display of all measuring values. ■ WINDOWS version 3.1 or higher
DIGSI comes with the program DIGRA for These requirements relate to the case
graphic display and evaluation of oscillo- when DIGSI 3 is used as stand-alone ver-
graphic fault records (see next page). sion. When used together with DIGSI 4,
For remote relay communication, the pro- the requirements for DIGSI 4 apply. In this
gram WINDIMOD is offered (option). case DIGSI 3 and DIGSI 4 run under the
common DIGSI 4 substation manager.
The DIGSI 3 program requires the follow-
ing hardware and software platform:
Fault analysis
The evaluation of faults is simplified by nu-
1 merical protection technology. In the event
of a fault in the network, all events as well
as the analog traces of the measured volt-
ages and currents are recorded.
The following types of memory are avail-
2 able:
■ 1 operational event memory
Alarms that are not directly assigned to
a fault in the network (e.g. monitoring
alarms, alternation of a set value, block-
3 ing of the automatic reclose function).
■ 5 fault-event histories
Alarms that occurred during the last
3 faults on the network (e.g. type of
fault detection, trip commands, fault lo-
cation, autoreclose commands). A re-
4 close cycle with one or more reclosures
is treated as one fault history. Each new
fault in the network overrides the oldest
fault history.
■ A memory for the fault recordings for Fig. 33: Display and evaluation of a fault record using DIGSI
5 voltage and current. Up to 8 fault record-
ings are stored. The fault recording
memory is organized as a ring buffer, i.e. Evaluation of the fault recording Data security, data interfaces
a new fault entry overrides the oldest
fault record. Readout of the fault record from the pro- DIGSI is a closed system as far as protec-
■ 1 earth-fault event memory (optional for tection device by DIGSI is done by fault- tion parameter security is concerned. The
6 isolated or resonant grounded networks) proof scanning procedures in accordance security of the stored data of the operating
Event record of the sensitive earth fault with the standard recommendation for PC is ensured by checksums. This means
detector (e.g. faulted phase, real compo- transmission of fault records. that it is only possible to change data with
nent of residual current). A fault record can also be read out repeat- DIGSI, which subsequently calculates a
edly. In addition to analog values, such as checksum for the changed data and stores
The time tag attached to the fault-record
voltage and current, binary tracks can also it with the data. Changes in the data and
7 events is a relative time from fault detec-
be transferred and presented. thus in safety-related protection data are
tion with a resolution of 1 ms. In the case
DIGSI is supplied together with the reliably detected.
of devices with integrated battery back-up
clock, the operational events as well as the DIGRA (Digsi Graphic) program, which DIGSI is, however, also an open system.
fault detection are assigned the internal provides the customer with full graphical The data export function supports export
clock time and date stamp. operating and evaluation functionality like of parameterization and marshalling data in
8 The memory for operational events and
that of the digital fault recorders (Oscil- standard ASCII format. This permits simple
lostores) from Siemens (see Fig. 33). access to these data by other programs,
fault record events is protected against fail-
Real-time presentation of analog distur- such as test programs, without endanger-
ure of auxiliary supply with battery back-up
bance records, overlaying and zooming of ing the security of data within the DIGSI
supply.
curves and visualization of binary tracks program system.
The integrated operator interface or a PC
(e.g. trip command, reclose command, etc.) With the import and export of fault records
9 supported by the programming tool DIGSI
are also part of the extensive graphical in IEEE standard format COMTRADE (ANSI),
is used to retrieve fault reports as well as
functionality, as are setting of measurement a high-performance data interface is pro-
for the input of settings and marshalling.
cursors, spectrum analysis and fault resist- duced which supports import and export of
ance derivation. fault records into the DIGSI partner program
DIGRA.
10 This enables the export of fault records
from Siemens protection units to custom-
er-specific programs via the COMTRADE
format.
Remote relay interrogation

The numerical relay range of Siemens can Office
also be operated from a remotely located 1
PC via modem-telephone connection.
Analog
Up to 254 relays can be addressed via ISDN
one modem connection if the star coupler
7XV53 is used as a communication node DIGSI Modem
(Fig. 34). PC, remotely located 2
The relays are connected to the star cou-
pler via optical fiber links.
Every protection device which belongs to Substation
a DIGSI substation structure has a unique
Star coupler
address. 3
The attached relays are always listening,
but only the addressed one answers the DIGSI 7XV53
operator command which comes from the Modem,
PC,centrally located optionally with
central PC. in the substation call-back function
If the relay located in a station is to be op- (option) 4
erated from a remote office, then a device
file is opened in DIGSI and protection dia-
log is chosen via modem. Signal converter
After password input, DIGSI establishes a
connection to the protection device after opt.
receiving a call-back from the system. RS485 RS485 Bus 5
In this way secure and timesaving remote
setting and readout of data are possible.
Diagnostics and control of test routines are
also possible without the need to visit the
substation. 6
7SJ60 7RW60 7SD60 7**5 7**6
Housing and terminal system
The protection devices and the corre-
sponding supplementary devices are avail- Fig. 34: Remote relay communication
able mainly in 7XP20 housings (Figs. 35 to 7
42). The dimension drawings are to be
found on 6/36 and the following pages. The heavy-duty current plug connectors For mounting of devices into cubicles, the
Installing of the modules in a cubicle with- provide automatic shorting of the c.t. cir- 8MC cubicle system is recommended. It is
out the housing is not permissible. cuits whenever the modules are with- described in Siemens Catalog NV21.
The width of the housing conforms to the drawn. This does not release from the care The standard cubicle has the following 8
19" system with the divisions 1/6, 1/3, 1/2 to be taken when c.t. secondary circuits dimensions:
or 1/1 of a 19" rack. The termination mod- are concerned. 2200 mm x 900 mm x 600 mm (HxWxD).
ule is located at the rear of devices for In the housing version for surface mount- These cubicles are provided with a 44 U
panel flush mounting or cubicle mounting. ing, the terminations are wired up on ter- high mounting rack (standard height unit
minal strips on the top and bottom of the U = 44.45 mm). It can swivel as much as
For electrical connection, screwed termi- 180° in a swing frame. 9
nals of the SIPROTEC 3 relay series and device. For this purpose two-tier terminal
also parallel crimp contacts are provided. blocks are used to attain the required num- The rack provides for a mounting width of
For field wiring, the use of the screwed ber of terminals (Fig. 36 right). 19", allowing, for example, 2 devices with
terminals is recommended; snap-in con- According to IEC 60529 the degree of pro- a width of 1/2 x 19" to be mounted. The
nection requires special tools. tection is indicated by the identifying IP, devices in the 7XP20 housing are secured
followed by a number for the degree of to rails by screws. Module racks are not 10
To withdraw crimp contact terminations of required (see Fig. 65b on page 6/33).
the SIPROTEC 3 relay series the following protection. The first digit indicates the pro-
tool is recommended: tection against accidental contact and in-
Extraction tool No. 135900 (from Weid- gress of solid foreign bodies, the second
müller, Paderbornstrasse 157, D-32760 digit indicates the protection against water.
Detmold). 7XP20 housings are protected against ac-
cess to dangerous parts by wire, dust and
dripping water (IP 51).
SIPROTEC 3 Relay Series

1
SIPROTEC 3 relays come in 1/6 to 1/1 of
19" wide cases with a standard height of
243 mm.
Their size is compatible with SIPROTEC 4
2 relays. Therefore, exchange is always pos-
sible.
Versions for flush and surface mounting
are available.
3 Terminations:
1/1 of 19" width

Flush-mounted version:
Each termination may be made via screw
4 terminal or crimp contact. The termination
modules used each contain:
4 termination points for measured volt-
ages, binary inputs or relay outputs
(max. 1.5 mm2) or
5 2 termination points for measured cur-
rents (screw termination max. 4 mm2,
crimp contact max. 2.5 mm2)
2 FSMA plugs for the fiber optic termina-
tion of the serial communication link
6
Surface mounted version:
1/3 1/2 of 19" width
Screw terminals (max. wire cross sec-
tion 7 mm2) for all wired terminations at
the top and bottom of the housing Fig. 35a/b: Numerical protection relays of the SIPROTEC 3 series in 7XP20 standard housing
7
2 FMS plugs for fiber optic termination
of the serial communication link at the
bottom of the housing
Fig. 35c
8
10
Fig. 36: SIPROTEC 3 relays left: Connection method Fig. 36 Right: Connection method for panel surface
for panel flush mounting including fiber-optic inter- mounting
faces;
SIPROTEC 4 Relay Series

1
SIPROTEC 4 relays come in 1/6 to 1/1 of
19" wide cases with a standard height of
243 mm.
Their size is compatible with SIPROTEC 3
relays. Therefore, compatible exchange is
always possible.
2
All wires (cables) are connected at the rear
side of the relay via ring tongue terminals.
A special relay version with loose cable-
connected operator panel (Fig. 42) is also
available. It allows for example installation
3
of the relay itself in the low-voltage com-
Fig. 38: 1/6 of 19" Fig. 39: 1/3 of 19"
partment and of the operator panel sepa-
rately in the door of the switchgear.
In this version voltage terminals are of the
plug-in type. Current terminals are again 4
screw-type.
Terminations:
Standard relay version with 5

screw terminals:
Current terminals:
Connection Wmax = 12mm W
ring cable lugs d1 = 5mm d1 6
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2

(AWG 13–11)
7
Direct Solid conductor, flexible
connection lead, connector sleeve Fig. 40: 1/2 of 19" Fig. 41: SIPROTEC 4 relay case versions
Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2
(AWG 13–11)
Voltage terminals: 8
Connection Wmax = 10mm
ring cable lugs d1 = 4 mm
Wire size 1.0 – 2.6 mm2
(AWG 17–13)
Direct
connection
Solid conductor, flexible
lead, connector sleeve
9
Wire size 0.5 – 2.5 mm2
(AWG 20–13)
Special relay version (Fig. 42)

with plug-in terminals: 10
Current terminals:
Screw type as above
Voltage terminals:
2-pin or 3-pin 0.5 – 1.0mm2
connectors 0.75 – 1.5mm2
Wire size 1.0 – 2.5mm2
Fig. 37 Fig. 42: SIPROTEC 4 combined protection, control and monitoring relay 7SJ63 with separate operator panel
Relay Selection Guide

1
Pilot wire differential
Generator protection
Fiber-optic current
Motor protection
2
Overcurrent
comparison
Differential
Distance
7SS50/52
7UM511
7UM512
7UM515
7UM516
Type
7SA511
7SA513
7SA522
7SD600
7SD502
7SD503
7SD511
7SD512
7UT512
7UT513
7SJ551
7SJ511
7SJ512
7SJ531
7VH80
7VH83
7SJ60
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
Protection functions
ANSI Description
4 No.*
14 Zero speed and underspeed dev. – – – – – – – – – – ■ – – – – ■ – – – – – – – – –
21 Distance protection, phase ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■
5 21N Distance protection, ground ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
24 Overfluxing – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ –
25 Synchronism check ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
27 Undervoltage – – – – – – – – – – ■ – – ■ ■ ■ – – – – – ■ ■ ■ –
6
27/59/ U/f protection – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ –
81
32 Directional power – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ – – ■
7 32F Forward power – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – ■

32R Reverse power – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – ■
37 Undercurrent or underpower – – – – – – – – – – ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – ■ – –
40 Field failure – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ – – –
8
46 Load unbalance, negative phase – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – ■ ■ – ■
sequence overcurrent
47 Phase sequence voltage ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – –
48 Incomplete sequence, locked – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – –
9 rotor, failure to accelerate
49 Thermal overload ■ – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■ – – ■ – – –
49R Rotor thermal protection – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – –
49S Stator thermal protection – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – ■ – – –
10
50 Instantaneous overcurrent – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■ – – ■ – – –
50N Instantaneous ground fault – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – –
overcurrent
51G Ground overcurrent relay – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ – – – – ■ ■ –
* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers
Fig. 43a
Pilot wire differential
Generator protection
Fiber-optic current
Motor protection
2
Overcurrent
comparison
Differential
Distance
7SS50/52
Type
7UM511
7UM512
7UM515
7UM516
7SA511
7SA513
7SA522
7SD600
7SD502
7SD503
7SD511
7SD512
7SJ511
7SJ512
7SJ531
7UT512
7UT513
7SJ551
7VH80
7VH83
7SJ55
7SJ60
7SJ61
7SJ62
7SJ63
ANSI Description
No.*
4
51GN Stator ground-fault overcurrent – – – – – – – – – – – ■ – – – – ■ – – – – – ■ ■ ■ –
51 Overcurrent with time delay – – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – ■ ■ – – ■ ■ – ■
51N Ground-fault overcurrent ■ ■ ■ – – – ■ ■ ■ – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – ■ ■ – – 5
with time delay
59 Overvoltage – ■ ■ – – – – – – – – ■ – – ■ ■ ■ – – – – – ■ ■ ■ –
59N Residual voltage ground-fault – – – – – – – – – ■ – ■ – – ■ ■ – – – – – – ■ – ■ ■
protection
6
64R Rotor ground fault – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ –
67 Directional overcurrent – – – – – – – – – ■ – ■ – – ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – –
67N Directional ground-fault ■ ■ – – – – – – – ■ – ■ – – ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – –
overcurrent 7
67G Stator ground-fault, directional – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ – –
overcurrent
68/78 Out-of-step protection ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■
79 Autoreclose ■ ■ ■ – – – – ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – – 8
81 Frequency relay – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – – – – – – ■ ■ ■ –
85 Carrier interface ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
86 Lockout relay, start inhibit – – – – – – – – – – – ■ – ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – –
9
87G Differential protection, generator – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – – – – – –
87T Differential protection, transf. – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – – – – – –
87B Differential protection, bus-bar – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – – – –
87M Differential protection, motor – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – ■ – – – – 10
87L Differential protection, line – – – ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
87N Restricted earth-fault protection – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ – ■ – – – – – –
92 Voltage and power directional rel. – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – –
50BF Breaker failure – ■ ■ – – – – – ■ ■ – ■ – ■ ■ ■ – – – – ■ – – – – –
* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers
Fig. 43b

1 Synchronism check
Voltage, Frequency
Breaker failure
Synchronizing
Autoreclose +
3
7RW600
Type
7SV512
7SV600
7VK512
7VE51
ANSI Description
4
No.*
24 Overfluxing – – – – ■
25 Synchronism check ■ – – – –
5 Synchronizing – ■ – – –
27 Undervoltage – – – – ■
27/59/ U/f protection – – – – ■
81
6 50BF Breaker failure – – ■ ■ –
59 Overvoltage – – – – ■
79 Autoreclose ■ – – – –
7 81 Frequency relay – – – – ■
10
* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device

Function Numbers
Fig. 43c
Relay Portraits
Relay portraits
1
Siemens manufactures a complete series
of numerical relays for all kinds of protec-
tion application.
The series is briefly portrayed on the fol-
lowing pages.
2
7SJ600
Universal overcurrent
and overload protection
3
■ Phase-segregated measurement and
indication (Input 3 ph, IE calculated)
■ All instantaneous, i.d.m.t. and d.t.
characteristics can be set individually
for phase and ground faults
■ Selectable setting groups
4
■ Integral autoreclose function (option)
■ Thermal overload, unbalanced load * only with 7SJ512
and locked rotor protection
■ Suitable for busbar protection with *
50 50N 49 48 50 50N BF 67N 5
reverse interlocking
■ With load monitoring, event and fault * *
memory 51 51N 46 79 51 51N 67 79
7SJ602*
Fig. 44: 7SJ600/7SJ602 Fig. 45: 7SJ511/512 6
Universal overcurrent
and overload protection
7SJ511
Functions as 7SJ600, however additionally:
■ Fourth current input transformer for con- Universal overcurrent protection
nection to an independent ground cur- ■ Phase-segregated measurement and
7
rent source (e.g. core-balance CT) indication (3 ph and E)
■ Optical data interface as alternative to ■ I.d.m.t and d.t. characteristics can be set
the wired RS485 version (located at the individually for phase and ground faults
relay bottom) ■ Suitable for busbar protection with
■ Serial PC interface at the relay front reverse interlocking 8
■ With integral breaker failure
protection
■ With load monitoring, event and fault
memory
■ Inrush stabilization 9
7SJ512
Digital overcurrent-time protection

with additional functions
10
Same features as 7SJ511, plus:
■ Autoreclose
■ Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-
tion for isolated, resonant or high-resist-
ance grounded networks
■ Directional module when used as
directional overcurrent relay (optional)
*) Commencement of delivery planned for end of 1999 ■ Inrush stabilization
Relay Portraits
7SJ61
1 Universal overcurrent
and overload protection with
control functions
■ Phase-segregated measurement and
indication (input 3 ph and E)
2 ■ All instantaneous, i.d.m.t. and d.t. char-
acteristics can be set individually for
phase and ground faults
■ Inrush stabilization
3 ■ Integral autoreclose function (option)
■ Thermal overload, unbalanced load and
locked rotor protection
■ Suitable for busbar protection with
reserve interlocking
4 memory 7SJ61
■ With integral breaker failure protection
■ With trip circuit supervision 56 50N 50BF 79 86 27 49R 51N
Control functions:
5 51 51N 74TC 37 50 59 48 51
■ Measured-value acquisition (current)
■ Limit values of current
■ Control of 1 C.B. 7SJ62 additionally: 46 50G 86 49 51G
■ Switchgear interlocking isolator/C.B.
67 76N 27 59 81o/u
6 7SJ62
FL 46 49 47
Digital overcurrent and overload protection
with additional functions
Features as 7SJ61, plus: Fig. 46: 7SJ61/7SJ62 Fig. 47: 7SJ551
7 ■ Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-
tion for isolated, resonant or high-
resistance grounded networks 7SJ551
■ Directional overcurrent protection Universal motor protection
■ Selectable setting groups and overcurrent relay
8 ■ Over and undervoltage protection
■ Thermal overload pretection
■ Over and underfrequency protection
– separate thermal replica for stator and
■ Distance to fault locator (option) rotor based on true RMS current
Control functions: measurement
– up to 2 heating time constants for the
9 ■ Measured-value acquisition (voltage) stator thermal replica
■ P, Q, cos ϕ and meter-reading calculation – separate cooling time constants for
■ Measured-value recording stator and rotor thermal replica
■ Limit values of I, V, P, Q, f, cos ϕ – ambient temperature biasing of
thermal replica
10 ■ Connection of up to 8 RTD sensors
ground elements
■ Real-Time Clock: last 3 events are stored
with real-time stamps of alarm and trip
data
Relay Portraits
Combined feeder protection and control

relay 7SJ63
1
Line protection
■ Nondirectional time overcurrent
■ Directional time overcurrent
■ IEC/ANSI and user definable TOC curves
■ Overload protection 2
■ Sensitive directional ground fault 50 50N 46 79
■ Negative sequence overcurrent
■ Under/Overvoltage
50BF 51 51N 49
■ Under/Overfrequency
■ Breaker failure 3
■ Autoreclosure 49LR 81u/o 67 67N
■ Fault locator
Motor protection 59 27 14 37
■ Thermal overload 4
■ Locked rotor 48 66/86 21FL 33
■ Start inhibit
■ Undercurrent
74TC 86
Control functions
5
■ Control up to 5 C.B.
■ Switchgear interlocking isolator/C.B. Fig. 49: 7SJ63
■ Key-operated switching authority
■ Feeder control diagram Combined feeder protection and control
■ Status indication of feeder devices at relay 7SJ531 6
graphic display
■ Measured-value acquisition Line protection
■ Signal and command indications ■ Nondirectional time overcurrent
■ P, Q, cos ϕ and meter-reading calculation ■ Directional time overcurrent
■ Measured-value recording ■ IEC/ANSI and user-definable TOC curves 7
■ Event logging ■ Overload protection
■ Switching statistics ■ Sensitive directional ground fault
■ Switchgear interlocking ■ Negative sequence overcurrent
■ 2 measuring transducer inputs ■ Under/Overvoltage
■ Breaker failure 8
I/O Capability
■ Autoreclosure
■ Fault locator
7SJ631 7SJ632/3 7SJ635/6
Motor protection
Binary 11 24/20 37/33 ■ Thermal overload 9
inputs ■ Locked rotor
■ Start inhibit
Contact 8+Life 11+Life 14+Life
outputs ■ Undercurrent
50 50N 79 49 59
Control functions
Motor 0 4(2) 8(4) 10
control ■ Measured-value acquisition 51 51N 67N 49LR 27
outputs ■ Signal and command indications
■ P, Q, cos ϕ and meter-reading calculation
Control of 3 5 5 ■ Measured-value recording 64 BF 46 37 5
switching ■ Event logging
devices
■ Switching statistics
■ Feeder control diagram with load Fig. 50: 7SJ531
Cases 1/2 of 19" 1/1 of 19" 1/1 of 19"
indication
Fig. 48 ■ Switchgear interlocking
Relay Portraits
7SA511
1 Line protection with

distance-to-fault locator
Universal distance relay for all networks,
with many additional functions, including
■ Universal carrier interface (PUTT, POTT,
2 Blocking, Unblocking)
■ Power swing blocking or tripping
■ Sensitive directional ground-fault deter-
mining for isolated and compensated
3 networks
■ High-resistance ground-fault protection
for grounded networks
■ Single and three-pole autoreclose
■ Synchrocheck
4 ■ Thermal overload protection for cables
21 25 68 49 21 67N 78
■ Free marshalling of optocoupler inputs 67N
and relay outputs
■ Line load monitoring, event and fault re- 21N 85 51N 78 79 21N 85 49
cording
5 47
7SA510
Fig. 51: 7SA511 Fig. 52: 7SA510
Line protection with distance-to-fault locator
6 (Reduced version of 7SA511)
Universal distance protection, suitable for
all networks, with additional functions,
including
■ Universal carrier interface (PUTT, POTT,
7 Blocking, Unblocking)
■ Power swing blocking and/or tripping
■ Sensitive directional ground-fault deter-
mining for isolated and compensated
8 networks
for grounded networks
■ Thermal overload protection for cables
■ Free marshalling of optocoupler inputs
9 and relay outputs
■ Line load monitoring, event and fault
recording
■ Three-pole autoreclose
10
Relay Portraits
7SA522
Full scheme distance protection 1

with add-on functions
■ Quadrilateral or MHO characteristic
■ Sub-cycle operating time
■ Universal teleprotection interface (PUTT,
POTT, Blocking, Unblocking) 2
■ Weak infeed protection
■ Power swing blocking/tripping
(time delayed or as directional compari-
son scheme) 3
■ Overvoltage protection
■ Switch-onto-fault protection
■ Stub bus O/C protection
■ Single and three-pole multi-shot auto-
reclosure*)
21 21N FL 50N
67N
4
■ Synchro-check*) 51N
■ Breaker failure protection*)
■ Trip circuit supervision 68 79 85 85N 59
■ Fault locator w./w.o. parallel line com-
pensation
79
*
25 50BF 5
■ Oscillographic fault recording
■ Voltage phase sequence
Fig. 53: 7SA522
7SA513
Transmission line protection

6
with distance-to-fault locator
■ Full scheme distance protection, with
operating times less than one cycle
(20 ms at 50 Hz), with a package of
extra functions which cover all the de- 7
mands of extra-high-voltage applications
■ Suitable for series-compensated lines
■ Universal carrier interface (permissive
and blocking procedures programmable)
■ Power swing blocking or tripping 8
■ Parallel line compensation
■ Load compensation that ensures high
accuracy even for high-resistance faults
and double-end infeed
■ High-resistance ground fault protection
50N 50
9
■ Backup ground-fault protection 21 25 67N BF 79 FL
51N
■ Overvoltage protection
■ Single and three-pole autoreclose
21N 59 85 85N 68 78
■ Synchrocheck option
■ Breaker failure protection 10
■ Free marshalling of a comprehensive
Fig. 54: 7SA513
range of optocoupler inputs and relay
outputs
■ Line load monitoring, event and fault
recording
■ High-performance measurement using
digital signal processors
■ Flash EPROM memories
*) available with Version 4.1 (Commencement of delivery planned for Oct. 1999)
Relay Portraits
7SD511
1 Current-comparison protection
for overhead lines and cables
■ With phase-segregated measurement
■ For serial data transmission
(19.2 kbits/sec)
2 – with integrated optical transmitter/
receiver for direct fiber-optic link up
to approx. 15 km distance
– or with the additional digital signal
transmission device 7VR5012 up to
150 km fiber-optic length
3 – or through a 64 kbit/s channel of avail-
able multipurpose PCM devices, via
fiber-optic or microwave link
■ Integral overload and breaker failure
protection
4 ■ Emergency operation as overcurrent
backup protection on failure of data link
■ Automatic measurement and correction
of signal transmission time, i.e. channel-
swapping is permissible 50 51 50
87L 51 87L
5 ■ Line load monitoring, event and fault
recording
49 BF 49 BF 79
7SD512
6 Current-comparison protection
Fig. 55: 7SD511 Fig. 56: 7SD512
for overhead lines and cables
with functions as 7SD511, but additionally
with autoreclose function for single and
three-pole fast and delayed autoreclosure.
7
7SD502
■ Pilot-wire differential protection for lines
and cables (2 pilot wires)
■ Up to about 25 km telephone-type pilot
8 wire length
■ With integrated overcurrent back-up and
overload protection
■ Also applicable to 3-terminal lines
(2 devices at each end)
9
7SD503
■ Pilot-wire differential protection for lines
■ Up to about 15 km pilot wire length
10 ■ With integrated overcurrent back-up and
overload protection 87L 50
■ Also applicable to 3-terminal lines
(2 devices at each end)
49 51
Fig. 57: 7SD502/503
Relay Portraits
7SD600
Pilot wire differential protection for lines 1

■ Up to about 10 km telephone-type pilot
wire length
■ Connection to an external current sum-
mation transformer 2
■ Pilot wire supervision (option)
■ Remote trip command
■ External current summation transformer
4AM4930 to be ordered separately
3
5
87 L
Fig. 58: 7SD600 6
7UT512
Differential protection for machines and

power transformers 7
with additional functions, such as:
■ Numerical matching to transformer ratio
and connection group (no matching
transformers necessary)
■ Thermal overload protection 8
■ Backup overcurrent protection
■ Measured-value indication for commis-
sioning (no separate instruments neces-
sary)
■ Load monitor, event and fault recording 9
7UT513
Differential protection
for three-winding transformers 10
with the same functions as 7UT512, plus:
■ Sensitive restricted ground-fault * 87 *
87T 49 50/51 87T 50G REF
protection
■ Sensitive d.t. or i.d.m.t. ground-fault-
o/c-protection 49 50/51
* 87REF or 50G
Fig. 59: 7UT512 Fig. 60: 7UT513
Relay Portraits
2 Central unit
Optic fibers
1 2 3 48
3
Bay units
4
87 BF
BB
Fig. 61: 7SS50 Fig. 62: 7SS52
5 7SS50
Numerical busbar and
breaker failure protection
■ With absolutely secure 2-out-of-2 meas-
6 urement and additional check zone, each
processed on separate microprocessor
hardware
■ Mixed current measurement
■ With fast operating time (< 15 ms)
7 ■ Extreme stability against c.t. saturation
■ Completely self-monitoring, including c.t.
circuits, isolator positions and run time
■ With integrated circuit-breaker failure
protection
8 ■ With commissioning-friendly aids (indica- 87
tion of all feeder, operating and stabiliz-
ing currents)
■ With event and fault recording Fig. 64: 7VH80
■ Designed for single and multiple bus- 87
bars, up to 8 busbar sections and 32
9 bays ■ Inrush stabilized through filtering
Fig. 63: 7VH83 ■ Fast operation: 15 ms (l > 5 x setting)
7SS52
■ Optionally, external voltage limiters
Distributed numerical busbar (varistor)
■ With commissioning-friendly aids (indica-
and breaker failure protection
10 tion of all feeder, operating and stabiliz-
7VH83
■ With absolutely secure 2-out-of-2 meas- ing currents)
urement and additional check zone, each ■ With event and fault recording High impedance differential relay
processed on separate microprocessor ■ Designed for single and multiple bus-
hardware ■ Three-phase type
bars, up to 12 busbar sections and 48
■ Phase-segregated measurement bays ■ Robust solid-state design
■ With fast operating time (< 15 ms) ■ Integral buswire supervision
■ Extreme stability against c.t. saturation 7VH80 ■ Integral c.t. shorting relay
■ Completely self-monitoring, including c.t. ■ Inrush stabilized through filtering
High impedance differential relay
circuits, isolator positions and run time ■ Fast operation: 21 ms (l > 5 x setting)
■ With integrated 2-stage circuit-breaker ■ Single-phase type ■ Optionally, external voltage limiters
failure protection ■ Robust solid-state design (varistors)
Relay Portraits
7UM511/12/15/16
Multifunctional devices 1
for machine protection
■ With 10 protection functions on average,
with flexible combination to form com-
plete protection systems, from the
smallest to the largest motor generator 2
units (see Fig. 66)
■ With improved measurement methods
based on Fourier filters and the evalua-
tion of symmetrical components (fully 7SJ511
numeric, frequency compensated)
3
recording
7UT513
See also separate reference list for
machine protection.
Order No. E50001-U321-A39-X-7600 7VE51 4
7VE51
7UM512
Paralleling device
for synchronization of generators and 5
networks
■ Absolutely secure against spurious
7UM511
switching due to duplicate measurement
with different procedures G
■ With numerical measurand filtering that 6
ensures exact synchronization even in
networks suffering transients
■ With synchrocheck option
■ Available in two versions: 7VE511 with-
out, 7VE512 with voltage and frequency 7UT512
balancing
7
7SJ511 51 Fig. 65b: Numerical protection of a generating unit

(example). Cubicle design.
8
7UT513 87T
7VE51 25 Synchronizing
9
7UM512 59N 64R 46
7UM511 81u 59 32 40 49
7UT512 87G
10
Fig. 65a: Numerical protection of a generating unit

(example). Single-line diagram.
Relay Portraits
Fig. 66
Numerical generator protection
1 Protection functions
7UM511
7UM512
7UM515
7UM516
Relay
ANSI
No.* Function
2 51 Overcurrent I>, t(+U<) ■ ■
IE>, t ■2)
I>>, t ■
51, 37 Overcurrent/Undercurrent I ><, t ■
3
49 Thermal overload I2t ■
46 Load unbalance I2ln>, t ■ ■ ■
(I2lln)2 t ■ ■ ■
4 87 Differential protection ∆lG>

∆lT>
∆lg>
59 Overvoltage U>, t ■ ■ ■
5 U>>, t ■ ■ ■
27 Undervoltage U>, t ■
t = f(U<) ■
U< with frequency evaluation U(f)<, t ■
6 Direct voltage U=><, t ■
59GN Stator UE >,t ■6) ■ ■ ■
ground fault protection <90% UE + lE>,t ■
53GN Stator RE <,t ■
7
ground fault protection 100%
Interturn fault protection UW >,t ■
81o Overfrequency f> ■3) ■4) ■3)
8 81u Underfrequency f< ■3) ■4) ■3)
3Z Reverse power (–P)>, t ■ ■7) ■
Forward power1) (+P)>, t ■ ■
40 Underexcitation (field failure) ϑ>, t ■ ■7)
9 protection ϑ1 + Ue>, t ■
64R Rotor RE<, t(fN) ■
ground fault protection RE<, t(1Hz) ■
IE>, t(fN) ■2)
10 1) for special applications
24 Overexcitation U/f >, t ■
(U/f)2 t 2) IE> sensitive stage,
protection ■
suitable for rotor or stator
21 Impedance protection Z<, t ■ earth fault protection
78 Out-of-step protection ϑ(Z) >, n ■ 3) altogether 4 frequency stages,
to be used as either f> or f<
87N Restricted ground fault prot. ∆lE 4) altogether 4 frequency stages,
Trip control inputs t, trip 4 4 4 4 to be used as either f> or f<
5) tank protection
Trip circuit monitoring 2 2 2 2
6) evaluation of displacement voltage
* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device Function Numbers 7) 1 stage
Relay Portraits
7VK512 7RW600
Autoreclose and check-synchronism relay Voltage and Frequency Relay 1

Highly flexible autoreclose relay with or ■ Intelligent protection and monitoring
without check-synchronism function. device
Available functions include: ■ Two separate voltage measuring inputs
■ Single or/and three-pole auto-reclosure ■ Applicable as two independent single-
■ Up to 10 autoreclose shots phase units or one multiphase unit 2
■ Independently settable dead times and
(positive sequence voltage)
reclaim time ■ High-set and low-set voltage supervision
■ Sequential fault recognition
U>>, U>, U<
■ Check-synchronism or dead line/dead
■ 4-step frequency supervision f><
bus charging ■ 4-step rate of change of frequency 3
supervision df/dt>
■ Event and fault recording (voltage inputs)
■ All voltage, frequency and df/dt steps
with separate definite time delay setting
■ Overfluxing (overexcitation) protection
7SV512 U/f (t) as thermal model,
U/f >> (DT delay) 4
Breaker failure protection relay
■ Voltage and frequency indication
■ Variable and failsafe breaker failure pro- ■ Fault recording
tection (2-out-of-4 current check, (momentary or RMS values)
2-channel logic and trip circuits) ■ RS485 serial interface for connection of 59 27 59N 81
■ Phase selective for single and three-pole a PC or coordination with control 5
autoreclosure systems
■ Reset time < 10 ms (sinusoidal current) 24
< 20 ms worst case
■ “No current“ condition control using the
breaker auxiliary contacts Fig. 67: 7RW600 6
■ Integral end fault protection
■ Event and fault recording
7SV600 7
Breaker failure protection relay
■ Phase selective for single and three-pole
autoreclosure
■ Reset time < 10 ms (Sinusoidal current) 8
< 20 ms worst case
■ “No current“ condition control using the
breaker auxiliary contacts
■ Event and fault recording 9
■ Lockout of trip command
10
50
BF
Fig. 68: 7SV600
Relay Dimensions
Case 7XP20 for relays 7SJ600, 7RW600, 7SD600, 7SV600

1
Back view Side view Panel cutout
70 71+2
7.3 56.5±0.3
2 ø5
or
M4
244
266 245+1 255±0.3
3
ø6
75 37 172 29.5
4 Fig. 69
Case 7XP2030-2 for relays 7SD511, 7SJ511/12, 7SJ531, 7UT512, 7VE51, 7SV512, 7SK512
5 Front view Side view Panel cutout
145 30 172 29.5 7.3 131.5
13.2 105 5.4
6 10 ø5
or
Optical 244 266 245 M4 255.8
fibre
interface
1.5 ø6
7
150 231.5 146

Fig. 70
8
Case 7XP2040-2 for relays 7SA511, 7UT513, 7SD512, 7UM5**, 7VE512, 7SD502/503
Front view Side view Panel cutout

9 Optical fiber interface 7.3 206.5
220 30 172 29.5 13.6 180
5.4
10 ø5
or
266 245 M4 255.8
ø6
10 1,5
225 231.5 221

All dimensions in mm.
Fig. 71
Relay Dimensions
Case 7XP2020-2 for relay 7VH83

1
Front view Side view Back view Panel cutout
75 30 172 29.5 70 7.3 56.3
13.2 30 5.4
ø5
2
or
M4
244 266 245 255.8
ø6 3
71
Fig. 72 4
Case 7XP2010-2 for relay 7VH80, 7TR93
Front view Side view Back view Panel cutout 5

75 30 172 29.5 70 7.3 56.3
20.5 30 5.4
ø5
or M4
111.0 133 112 122.5 6
ø6
71
Fig. 73
7
Case for relay 7SJ551
Front view Side view Back view 8

100
105 30 172 29.5 86.4
244 266 255.9 10
115
Fig. 74
Relay Dimensions
Case 7XP2060-2 for relay 7SA513

1
Front view Side view Panel cutout
450 30 172 29.5 7.3 431.5
445 13.2 405 5.4
2
ø 5 or M4
266 266 245 255.8
3 1.5
10
ø6
Optical fiber 446

4 interface
Fig. 75
146/5.74
5 Case for 7SJ61, 62
Rear view 1
150/5.90
Panel cutout
145/5.70
Side 29.5 172/6.77 34
view 1.16 1.33
Mounting plate
ø5 or M4/
0.2 diameter
6
255.8/10.07
245/9.64
266/10.47
FO ø6/0.24
7
244/9.61
2 diameter
0.07 SUB-D
Connector
105/4.13
131.5/5.17
8 RS232-port
Fig. 76a
Case for 7SJ631/632/633 225/8.85 221/8.70

Rear view 1 Panel cutout
220/8.66
9 Side 29.5 172/6.77
view 1.16
Mounting plate
ø5 or M4/
0.2 diameter
10 255.8/10.07
245/9.65
266/10.47
FO ø6/0.24
244/9.61
2 diameter
0.07 SUB-D
Connector
180/7.08
206.5/8.12
RS232-port
Fig. 76b All dimensions in mm.
Relay Dimensions
Case for 7SJ631/632/633 Detached operator panel

Special version with detached operator panel 1
Side view Rear view Side view
225/8.85
220/8.66 Mounting 2
29.5 27.1 plate
202.5/7.97 29 30 1.16 1.06
1.14 1.18
266/10.47
266/10.47 312/12.28 244/9.61
FO
2
4
0.07
Connection cable
RS232-
68 poles to basic 5
unit length 2.5 m/8 ft.,
port 2.4 in
Mounting plate
Fig. 77: 7SJ63, 1/2 surface mounting case (only with detached panel, see Fig. 42, page 6/21)
6
Case for 7SJ635/636:

Special version with detached operator panel Rear view
Side view 450/17.71 7

202.5/7.97 29 30 445/17.51
1.14 1.18
266/10.47 312/12.28 244/9.61

FO 9
SUB-D
Connector
10
Mounting plate
Fig. 78: 7SJ63, 1/1 surface mounting case (only with detached panel, see Fig. 42, page 6/21) All dimensions in mm.
Relay Dimensions
7XR9672 Core-balance current transformer (zero sequence c.t.)

1
M6
14
K
120 L
3 102
55 96 104
k l
14.5 x 6.5 K
200 2 120
4
Fig. 79
7XR9600 Core-balance current transformer (zero sequence c.t.)

5
94
6
12 80 Diam.
149
7 81
Diam.
6.4
143 54
8 170
Fig. 80
10
Relay Dimensions
4AM4930 Current summation transformer for relay 7SD600

1
121
110 92
G H I K L M Y 2
90 62
3
75
4
64
64 A B C D E F Z
63.5 100 63.5

110
6
G H I K L M Y
7
Fig. 81
10
Typical Protection Schemes
Application Circuit Circuit equipment Page

1 group number protected
Cables and 1 Radial feeder circuit 6/43

overhead lines
2 Ring main circuit 6/43
2
3 Distribution feeder with reclosers 6/44
4 Parallel feeder circuit 6/44
5 Cable or short overhead line with infeed 6/45
from both ends
3
6 Overhead lines or longer cables with infeed 6/45
from both ends
7 Subtransmission line 6/46
8 Transmission line with reactor 6/48
4
9 Transmission line or cable 6/49
(with wide band communication)
10 Transmission line, breaker-and-a-half terminal 6/49
5 Transformers 11 Small transformer infeed 6/51

12 Large or important transformer infeed 6/51
13 Dual infeed with single transformer 6/52
14 Parallel incoming transformer feeder 6/52
6
15 Parallel incoming transformer feeder with bus tie 6/53
16 Three-winding transformer 6/53
17 Autotransformer 6/54
7 18 Large autotransformer bank 6/54
Motors 19 Small and medium-sized motors 6/55

20 Large HV motors 6/55
8 Smallest generator < 500 kW 6/56

Generators 21
22 Small generator, around 1 MW 6/56
23 Large generator > 1 MW 6/57
9 24 Large generator >1 MW feeding into a network 6/57

with isolated neutral
25 Generator-transformer unit 6/59
Busbars 26 Busbar protection by o/c relays with 6/60

10 reverse interlocking
27 High-impedance differential busbar protection 6/61
28 Low-impedance differential busbar protection 6/61
Fig. 82
1. Radial feeder circuit

Infeed
Notes: 1
1) Autoreclosure 79 only with O.H. lines. Transformer
2) Negative sequence o/c protection 46 as protection,
sensitive backup protection against un- see Fig. 94
symmetrical faults.
A
General hints:
2
– The relay at the far end (D) gets the B I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ARC
shortest operating time. Further 51 51N 46 79 7SJ60
Relays further upstream have to be feeders
time-graded against the next down- 2) 1)
stream relay in steps of about 0.3 3
seconds.
C I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
– Inverse-time curves can be selected
according to the following criteria: 51 51N 46 7SJ60
– Definite time:
source impedance large compared to 4
the line impedance, i.e. small current
variation between near and far end Load
faults
D I>, t IE>, t I2>, t
– Inverse time:
Longer lines, where the fault current is 51 51N 46 7SJ60
much less at the end of the line than at 5
the local end.
– Very or extremely inverse time:
Load Load
Lines where the line impedance is large
compared to the source impedance
(high difference for close-in and remote Fig. 83 6
faults) or lines, where coordination with
fuses or reclosers is necessary.
Steeper characteristics provide also
higher stability on service restoration Infeed
(cold load pick-up and transformer in Transformer
rush currents) protection, 7
see Fig. 97
2. Ring main circuit 52 52

General hints:
7SJ60 7SJ60
– Operating time of overcurrent relays to 8
52 I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ϑ> 52 I>, t IE>, t I2>, t ϑ>
be coordinated with downstream fuses
of load transformers. 51 51N 46 49 51 51N 46 49
(Preferably very inverse time characteris-
tic with about 0.2 s grading-time delay
– Thermal overload protection for the 9
cables (option)
– Negative sequence o/c protection 46 as
sensitive protection against unsymmetri-
cal faults (option)
10
Fig. 84
3. Distribution feeder with

Infeed reclosers
1
General hints:
– The feeder relay operating characteris-
tics, delay times and autoreclosure
cycles must be carefully coordinated
2 with downstream reclosers, sectionaliz-
ers and fuses.
52 I>>, IE>>, I2>, t 52 The instantaneous zone 50/50N is nor-
I>, t IE>, t mally set to reach out to the first main
50/ 50N/ 7SJ60 feeder sectionalizing point. It has to en-
46
51 51N sure fast clearing of close-in faults and
3 prevent blowing of fuses in this area
79 Auto- (“fuse saving”). Fast autoreclosure is
reclose initiated in this case.
Further
feeders Further time delayed tripping and reclo-
sure steps (normally 2 or 3) have to be
Recloser
graded against the recloser.
4 – The o/c relay should automatically
switch over to less sensitive characteris-
Sectionalizers tics after longer breaker interruption
times to enable overriding of subse-
quent cold load pick-up and transformer
5 Fuses
inrush currents.
6 Fig. 85
4. Parallel feeder circuit
General hints:
Infeed
7 – This circuit is preferably used for the
52 interruption-free supply of important
consumers without significant backfeed.
52 I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t 52 – The directional o/c protection 67/67N
trips instantaneously for faults on the
51 51N 49 46 7SJ60
8 protected line. This allows the saving
of one time-grading interval for the o/c-
O H line or Protection relays at the infeed.
O H line or
cable 1 cable 2 same as – The o/c relay functions 51/51N have
line or cable 1 each to be time-graded against the
relays located upstream.
9 51 51N 7SJ62
67 67N
52
10 52
52
52 52
Load Load
Fig. 86
5. Cables or short overhead lines with

infeed from both ends Infeed
1
Notes: 52
1) Autoreclosure only with overhead lines 52
2) Overload protection only with cables
52 7SJ60 1) 52
3) Differential protection options: 79
– Type 7SD511/12 with direct fiber-optic 2) 2
connection up to about 20 km or via a 51N/ 87L 49 7SD600 or 4)
64 kbit/s channel of a general purpose 51N 7SD5**
PCM connection (optical fiber, micro- Same
wave) Line or protection
7SJ60 3)
– Type 7SD600 with 2-wire pilot cables cable for parallel line,
up to about 10 km if applicable
3
7SD600 or
– Type 7SD502 with 2-wire pilot cables 51N/ 87L 49 7SD5**
51N 4)
up to about 20 km
2)
– Type 7SD503 with 3-wire pilot cables
up to about 10 km. 52 79 52
1) 4
4) Functions 49 and 79 only with relays
7SD5**. 7SD600 is a cost-effective solu- 52
tion where only the function 87L is
required (external current summation 52 52 52 52
transformer 4AM4930 to be ordered
separately)
Load Backfeed 5
Fig. 87
6. Overhead lines or longer cables with 6

infeed from both ends Infeed
Notes:
52
1) Teleprotection logic 85 for transfer trip 52
or blocking schemes. Signal transmis- 7
sion via pilot wire, power-line carrier,
microwave or optical fiber (to be pro- 52 52
vided separately). The teleprotection
supplement is only necessary if fast 21/ 2)
67N
fault clearance on 100% line length is 21N
7SA511
required, i.e. second zone tripping 3) 8
(about 0.3 s delay) cannot be accepted 85 79 4) Same
for far end faults. Line or protection
2) Directional ground-fault protection 67N cable for parallel line,
1) if applicable
with inverse-time delay against high-
resistance faults
3) Single or multishot autoreclosure 79 85 79
3) 9
only with overhead lines 7SA511
2)
4) Reduced version 7SA510 may be used 21/
where no, or only 3-pole autoreclosure 21N 67N 4)
is required.
52 52 10
52
52 52 52 52
Load Backfeed
Fig. 88
7. Subtransmission line
1 Note:
1) Connection to open delta winding if
available. Relays 7SA511 and 7SJ512
can, however, also be set to calculate
the zero-sequence voltage internally.
2 General hints:
– Distance teleprotection is proposed as
main, and time graded directional O/C as
backup protection.
1) – The 67N function of 7SA511 provides
3 additional high-resistance ground fault
protection. It can be used in a directional
comparison scheme in parallel with the
21 67 21/21N-function, but only in POTT mode.
25 79 21N 67N If the distance protection scheme ope-
4 rates in PUTT mode, 67N is only availa-
68 51 ble as time-delayed function.
78 67N 51N – Recommended schemes:
PUTT on medium and long lines with
phase shift carrier or other secure com-
BF 7SJ62 munication channel.
5 POTT on short lines.
BLOCKING with On/Off carrier (all line
S lengths).
85 CH To remote
R line end
6 7SA511
Signal transmission
equipment
Fig. 89
7
10
Application criteria for frequently used teleprotection schemes
Permissive under- Permissive over- Blocking Unblocking 1

reaching transferred reaching transferred
tripping (PUTT) tripping (POTT)
Preferred Signal trans- Secure and dependable channel: ■ Dependable chan- Applicable only with
application mission: ■ Frequency shift power line carrier (phase-to- nel (only with ex- ■ Frequency shift
phase HF coupling to the protected line, better ternal faults) power line carrier 2
HF coupling to a parallel running line to avoid ■ Amplitude modu-
sending through the fault) lated ON/OFF
■ Microwave, in particular digital (PCM) power line carrier
■ Fiber optic cables (same frequency
can be used at all 3
terminals)
Line con- Normally used with ■ Short lines in particu- All kinds of line EHV lines
figuration: medium and long lines lar when high fault re- (Preferred US
sistance coverage is practice)
required 4
(7SA511/513 relays al- ■ Multi-terminal and
low use also with short tapped lines with in-
lines due to their inde- termediate infeed ef-
pendent X and R setting fects
of all distance zones).
5
Advantages: ■ Simple method ■ No distance zone
■ Tripping of underrea- overreaching pro-
ching zone does not blems, when applied
depend on the chan- with CCVTs on short
nel (release signal lines
from the remote line ■ Applicable to extreme
6
end not necessary). short lines below the same as same as
■ No distance zone or minimum zone setting for POTT for POTT
time coordination be- limit
tween line ends ne- ■ No problems with the
cessary, i.e. this mode impact of parallel line 7
can easily be used coupling.
with different relay
types.
Drawbacks: ■ Parallel, teed and ■ Distance zone and Same as for POTT,
tapped lines may time coordination with same as however, loss of re- 8
cause underreach remote line end relays for POTT mote end signal
problems. Careful necessary does not completely
consideration of zero- ■ Tripping depends on Except that a weak block the protection
sequence coupling receipt of remote end infeed supplement scheme. Tripping is
and intermediate in- signal (additional inde- is not necessary in this case released 9
feed effects is neces- pendent underrea- with a short time
sary. ching zone of 7SA511/ No continuous on- delay of about
■ Not applicable with 513 relays avoids this line supervision of 20 ms (unblocking
weak infeed termi- problem). the channel possi- logic).
nals. ■ Weak infeed supple- ble!
ment necessary 10
Fig. 90
8. Transmission line with reactor – Operating time of the 7SA513 relay is in – Both 7SA513 and 7SA511 can practise
the range of 15 to 25 ms dependent on selective single-pole and/or three-pole
1 Note: the particular fault condition, while the tripping and autoreclosure.
1) 51G only applicable with grounded reac- operating time of the 7SA511 is 25 to The ground current directional compari-
tor neutral. 35 ms respectively. son protection 67N of the 7SA513 relay
These tripping times are valid for faults uses phase selectors based on symmet-
2) If phase CTs at the low-voltage reactor in the underreaching distance zone rical components. Thus, single pole au-
side are not available, the high-voltage (80 to 85% of the line length). Remote toreclosure can also be practised with
2 phase CTs and the CT in the neutral can end faults must be cleared by the super- high-resistance faults.
be connected to a restricted ground fault imposed teleprotection scheme. Its The 67N function of the 7SA511 relay
protection using one 7VH80 high-imped- overall operating time depends on the should be used as time delayed direc-
ance relay. signal transmission time of the channel tional O/C backup in this case.
(typically 15 to 20 ms for frequency shift – The 67N functions are provided as high-
3 General hints: audio-tone PLC or Microwave channels, impendance fault protection. 67N of the
and lower than 10 ms for ON/OFF PLC 7SA513 relay is normally used with an
– Distance relays are proposed as main 1 or digital PCM signalling via optical additional channel as separate carrier
and main 2 protection. Duplicated 7SA513 fibres). scheme. Use of a common channel with
is recommended for long (>100 km) and
Teleprotection schemes based on distance protection is only possible in
heavily loaded lines or series-compensat-
7SA513 and 7SA511 have therefore ope- the POTT mode. The 67N function in the
4 ed lines and in all cases where extreme
rating times in the order of 40 ms and 7SA511 is blocked when function 21/
short operating times are required due
50 ms each. With state-of-the-art two- 21N picks up. It can therefore only be
to system stability problems.
cycle circuit breakers, fault clearing used in parallel with the distance direc-
7SA513 as main 1 and 7SA511 as main times well below 100 ms (4 to 5 cycles) tional comparison scheme POTT using
2 can be used in the normal case. can normally be achived. one common channel. Alternatively, it can
– Dissimilar carrier schemes are recom- be used as time-delayed backup protec-
5 mended for main 1 and main 2 protection.
tion, for example PUTT, and POTT or
Blocking/Unblocking
6
CC
52L
7SJ600
52R
TC1 TC2
7 CVT
50
50N
51
51N BF
8 Reactor 87R 7VH83

21 21
25 59 21N 25 21N 2)
79 67N 79 67N
9 51G 7SJ600
68 68 7SA522 or
BF 85 7SA511 BF
79 79 BF, 59
S Direct Trip
Trip
85 7SA513 R Channel
10 52L
S Channel To remote
R 2 line end
S Channel
R 3
Fig. 91
9. Transmission line or cable

(with wide band communication)
CC
1
Note: 52L
1) Overvoltage protection only with
TC1 TC2
7SA513
General hints:
2
– Digital PCM coded communication (with
n x 64 kBit/s channels) between line
ends is now getting more and more fre- 1)
quently available, either directly by opti- 21
79 97L 25 59 21N
cal or microwave point-to-point links, or
via a general purpose digital communica- 3
tion network. BF 79 67N
In both cases, the unit-type current com-
parison protection 7SD511/12 can be
applied. It provides absolute phase and-
zone selectivity by phase-segregated
measurement, and is not affected by 68
85 BF
7SA522 or 4
power swing or parallel line zero-se- 79 7SA511
quence coupling effects. It is further a
current-only protection that does not 7SD512 S Channel
need VT connection. For this reason, the R 1
adverse effects of CVT transients are
To remote
5
not applicable. optial fiber FO S
This makes it in particular suitable for X.21 PCM line end
Wire R
double and multicircuit lines where com-
plex fault situations can occur. Direct connection with dedicated
Pilot wire protection can only be applied fibers up to about 20 km
to short lines or cables due to the inher- 6
ent limitation of the applied measuring
Fig. 92
principle. The 7SD511/12 can be applied
to lines up to about 20 km in direct re-
lay-to-relay connection via dedicated op- 10. Transmission line, breaker-and-a-half
tical fiber cores (see also application 5), terminal
and also to much longer distances up to
7
about 100 km by using separate PCM Notes:
devices for optical fiber or microwave
1) When the line is switched off and the
transmission.
line isolator is open, high through-fault-
The 7SD511/512 then uses only a small
currents in the diameter may cause mal-
part (64 kBit/s) of the total transmission
operation of the distance relay due to 8
capacity being in the order of Mbits/s.
unequal CT errors (saturation).
– The unit protection 7SD511 can be com- Normal practice is therefore to block the
bined with the distance relay 7SA513 or distance protection (21/21N) and the di-
7SA511 to form a redundant protection rectional ground fault protection (67N)
system with dissimilar measuring princi- under this condition via an auxiliary con-
ples complementing each other. This tact of the line isolator. Instead, a stand-
9
provides the highest degree of availabili- by overcurrent function (50/50N, 51/51N)
ty. Also, separate signal transmission is released to protect the remaining stub
ways should be used for main 1 and between the breakers (“stub“protection).
main 2 protection, e.g. optical fiber or
2) Overvoltage protection only with
micro-wave, and power line carrier 10
7SA513
(PLC).
1. The criteria for selection of 7SA513 or General hints:
7SA511 are the same as discussed in
– The protection functions of one diame-
application 8.
ter of a breaker-and-a-half arrangement
The current comparison protection
are shown.
has a typical operating time of 25 ms
for faults on 100% line length includ- – The currents of two CTs have each to be
ing signalling time. summed up to get the relevant line
current as input for main 1 and 2 line
protection.
– The location of the CTs on both sides of – For the selection of the main 1 and main one breaker and the manual closure of
the circuit-breakers is typical for substa- 2 line protection schemes, the com- the other breaker, may be made selecta-
1 tions with dead-tank breakers. Live-tank ments of application examples 8 and 9 ble by a control switch.
breakers may have CTs only on one side apply. – A coordinated scheme of control circuits
to reduce cost. A Fault between circuit – Autoreclosure (79) and synchrocheck is necessary to ensure selective tripping,
breakers and CT (end fault) may then function (25) are each assigned directly interlocking and reclosing of the two
still be fed from one side even when the to the circuit breakers and controlled by breakers of one line (or transformer
breaker has opened. Consequently, final main 1 and 2 line protection in parallel. feeder).
2 fault clearing by cascaded tripping has to In case of a line fault, both adjacent – The voltages for synchrochecking have
be accepted in this case. breakers have to be tripped by the line to be selected according to the breaker
The 7SV512 relay provides the neces- protection. The sequence of automatic and isolator positions by a voltage repli-
sary end fault protection function and reclosure of both breakers or, alterna- ca circuit.
trips the breakers of the remaining in- tively, the automatic reclosure of only
3 feeding circuits.
4 87 7SS5. or
BB1 7VH83
BB1
7SV512 or
7VK512 7SV600
BF 85
5 UBB1 7SA522 or
1) 1) 2) 7SA511
79 21 50 51
21N 67N 50N 51N 59
52
UBB1
25
6 UL1 or UL2
or UBB2 UL1
Line 1
7 7VK512 87L 7SD511/12
79
52
UL1 or UBB1
8 25
UL2 or UBB2
BF
7SV512 or
7SV600
Line 2
9 7VK512 UL2
79
Main 1
UL2 or 52 Protection of Line 2
UL1 or UBB1 (or transformer,
10 25
Main 2 if applicable)
UBB2
UBB2
BF
7SV512 or
7SV600
BB2
87 7SS5. or
BB2 7VH83
Fig. 93
11. Small transformer infeed

HV infeed
General hints: 1
– Ground-faults on the secondary side are 52 I>> I>, t IE> ϑ> I2>, t
detected by current relay 51G which,
however, has to be time-graded against 50 51 50N 49 46 7SJ60
downstream feeder protection relays.
The restricted ground-fault relay 87N can 2
optionally be provided to achieve fast Optional resistor or
clearance of ground faults in the trans- 63 reactor
RN
former secondary winding.
Relay 7VH80 is of the high-impedance
type and requires class X CTs with equal
transformation ratio. I>> 3
– Primary breaker and relay may be re- 87N
placed by fuses.
51G
52 7VH80 7SJ60
IE>
4
Distribution bus
52
o/c- Fuse
relay
Load Load
5
Fig. 94
12. Large or important transformer 6

infeed
HV infeed High voltage, e.g. 115 kV
Notes:
1) Three winding transformer relay 52 I>> I>, t IE> ϑ> I2>, t
type 7UT513 may be replaced by two-
winding type 7UT512 plus high-imped- 50 51 51N 49 46 7SJ60 or 7
7SJ61
ance-type restricted ground-fault relay
7VH80. However, class X CT cores
would additionally be necessary in this
2)
case. (See small transformer protection) 7SJ60
51G
2) 51G may additionally be provided, 63 8
in particular for the protection of the
neutral resistance, if provided.
3) Relays 7UT512/513 provide numerical 1)
ratio and vector group adaption.
Matching transformers as used with 87N 87T 7UT513
traditional relays are therefore no longer
9
applicable. I>, t IE>, t
51 51N
52 7SJ60
10
Load bus, e.g. 13.8 kV
52 52
Load Load
Fig. 95
13. Dual-infeed with single transformer
1 Protection line 1 Protection line 2 Notes:

same as line 2 21/21N or 87L + 51 + optionally 67/67N
1) Line CTs are to be connected to sepa-
52 52 rate stabilizing inputs of the differential
relay 87T in order to assure stability in
7SJ60 or case of line through-fault currents.
7SJ61
2 I>> I>, t IE>, t
2) Relay 7UT513 provides numerical ratio
and vector group adaption. Matching
transformers, as used with traditional
50 51 51N
relays, are therefore no longer applica-
ble.
46 49
3
I2> ϑ>
63 87N 87T 7UT513
4 7SJ60 51G
I>> IE>
7SJ60
51 51N
5 52
Load
bus
52 52 52
Load
6
Fig. 96
14. Parallel incoming transformer

7SJ60 or feeders
7 HV infeed 1 7SJ61 HV infeed 2
52 52 Note:
I>> I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t
1) The directional functions 67 and 67N
50 51 51N 49 46 do not apply for cases where the trans-
formers are equipped with transformer
8 differential relays 87T.
Protection
same as
63 infeed 1
7SJ62
9 51G IE>, t I>, t IE>, t I> IE>
51 51N 67 67N
7SJ60
10 1)
52 52
Load
bus
52 52 52
Load Load Load
Fig. 97
15. Parallel incoming transformer

feeders with bus tie
Infeed 1 7SJ60 Infeed 2 1
Note:
1) Overcurrent relays 51, 51N each con- I>> I>, t IE>, t ϑ> I2>, t
nected as a partial differential scheme. 50 51 51N 49 46
This provides simple and fast busbar
protection and saves one time-grading Protection
same as
2
step.
63 63 infeed 1
7SJ60 7SJ60
51G I>, t IE>, t IE>, t I>, t 3

51 51N 51N 51
7SJ60
16. Three-winding transformer

4
52 52
Notes: 52
1) The zero-sequence current must be
blocked from entering the differential 52 52
relay by a delta winding in the CT con- 5
nection on the transformer sides with Load Load
grounded winding neutral. This is to avoid
false operation with external ground
faults (numerical relays provide this func- Fig. 98
tion by calculation). About 30% sensitivi- 6
ty, however, is then lost in case of inter-
nal faults.
Optionally, the zero-sequence current HV Infeed
can be regained by introducing the wind-
ing neutral current in the differential re- 52 I>> I>, t ϑ> I2>, t
lay (87T). Relay type 7UT513 provides
50 51 49 46
7SJ60 or 7
two current inputs for this purpose. 7SJ61
By using this feature, the ground fault
sensitivity can be upgraded again to its
original value.
2) Restricted ground fault protection (87T)
is optional. It provides back-up protec- 51G 7SJ60 51G 7SJ60
8
63
tion for ground faults and increased
ground fault sensitivity (about 10%IN, 87T 7UT513
compared to about 20 to 30%IN of the 1)
transformer differential relay). 87N 7VH80 87N 7VH80
Separate class X CT-cores with equal 9
transmission ratio are additionally re-
quired for this protection.
General hint: I>,t IE>, t I>,t IE>, t
– In this example, the transformer feeds 51 51N 51 51N

two different distribution networks with 7SJ60 7SJ60 10
cogeneration. Restraining differential re-
lay inputs are therefore provided at each M.V. M.V.
transformer side. 52 52 52 52
If both distribution networks only con-
sume load and no through-feed is possi-
ble from one MV network to the other,
parallel connection of the CTs of the two Load Backfeed Load Backfeed
MV transformer windings is admissible
allowing the use of a two-winding differ-
ential relay (7UT512). Fig. 99
17. Autotransformer
7SJ60 or
1 7SJ61 52
Notes:
1) 87N high-impedance protection requires
51N 50 46 50 87N 7VH80 special class X current transformer cores
BF 51 2)
with equal transmission ratio.
2) The 7SJ60 relay can alternatively be
1)
2 connected in series with the 7UT513 re-
lay to save this CT core.
General hint:
7UT513 87T 49
63 – Two different protection schemes are
provided:
3 87T is chosen as low-impedance three-
52 52 winding version (7UT513). 87N is a sin-
1) gle-phase high-impedance relay (7VH80)
50
51 connected as restricted ground fault pro-
51 tection. (In this example, it is assumed
4 46 that the phaseends of the transformer
winding are not accessible on the neu-
50 tral side, i.e. there exists a CT only in the
59N BF 1) 50
BF neutral grounding connection.)
7RW60 7SJ60
51N
5
7SJ60
Fig. 100
6
18. Large autotransformer bank
68
21 21N 78 7SA513 General hints:
7SV600 7SV600
– The transformer bank is connected in a
7 50 50 11/2 breaker arrangement.
BF BF Duplicated differential protection is pro-
EHV 52 52 posed:
Main 1: Low-impedance differential pro-
tection 87TL (7UT513) connected to the
transformer bushing CTs.
8 HV
Main 2: High-impedance overall differen-
tial protection 87TH (7VH83). Separate
87 50 class X cores and equal CT ratios are re-
7VH83 TH BF 7SV600 quired for this type of protection.
52 – Back-up protection is provided by dis-
9 tance relays (7SA513 and 7SA511), each
7SA511 “looking“ with an instantaneous first
7UT513 87 49 zone about 80% into the transformer
TL 21 and with a time-delayed zone beyond
63 the transformer.
– The tertiary winding is assumed to feed
10 21N a small station supply network with iso-
52 lated neutral.
68
78
51
52
50
BF 50
BF 7SV600
59N 51G
7RW60 7SJ60 7SJ60

Fig. 101
19. Small and medium-sized motors

< about 1 MW
a) With effective or low-resistance 52 I>> I E> ϑ> Locked I 2> 1
grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor) rotor
49 7SJ60
General hint: 50 51N 49 CR 46
– Applicable to low-voltage motors and
high-voltage motors with low-resistance 2
grounded infeed (IE ≥ IN Motor). M
Fig. 102a
3
b) With high-resistance grounded infeed
(IE ≤ IN Motor)
Notes: 52 I>> ϑ> Locked I 2> I<
rotor
1) Window-type zero sequence CT. 49 7SJ62 or
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-
50 49
CR 46 37
7SJ551 4
tion 67N only applicable with infeed 3)
from isolated or Peterson-coil-grounded I E> 2)
network. 7XR96
(For dimensioning of the sensitive direc- 1) 51G 67G
tional ground fault protection, see also 60/1A
application circuit No. 24)
5
3) If 67G ist not applicable, relay 7SJ602
can be applied.
M
Fig. 102b 6
20. Large HV motors > about 1 MW
Notes:
7SJ62 or
1) Window-type zero sequence CT. 7SJ551 7
2) Sensitive directional ground-fault protec-
tion 67N only applicable with infeed 52 I>> ϑ> Locked I2> U<
from isolated or Peterson-coil-grounded rotor
network. 50 49 49 46 27
3) This function is only needed for motors CR
where the runup time is longer than the
8
Optional
safe stall time tE. IE> 2) I< 37
According to IEC 79-7, the tE-time is the 7XR96
1) 51G 67G
time needed to heat up AC windings, 60/1A
when carrying the starting current IA,
from the temperature reached in rated Startup 9
service and at maximum ambient tem- super- 49T 87M 7UT512
perature to the limiting temperature. visior 3) 5) 6)
A separate speed switch is used to
supervise actual starting of the motor. 3)
The motor breaker is tripped if the motor Speed RTD's 4)
does not reach speed in the preset time. switch M 10
optional
The speed switch is part of the motor
delivery itself.
4) Pt100, Ni100, Ni120
5) 49T only available with relay type 7SJ5
6) High impedance relay 7VH83 may be
used instead of 7UT12 if separate
class x CTs. are provided at the terminal
and star-point side of the motor winding. Fig. 103
21. Smallest generators < 500 kW

LV
1
G I>, IE>, t I2> ϑ>

2 51 7SJ60
51N 46 49
3 Fig. 104a: With solidly grounded neutral
Note:
MV 1) If a window-type zero-sequence CT is
4 provided for sensitive ground fault pro-
tection, relay 7SJ602 with separate
G1 I>, IE>, t I2> ϑ> ground current input can be used
(similar to Fig. 102b of application exam-
Generator 2 51
46 49 7SJ60 ple 19b).
51N
1)
5
VN
RN =
√3 • (0.5 to 1) • Irated
6
Fig. 104b: With resistance grounded neutral
22. Small generator, typically 1 MW

7 Note:
52 1) Two CTs in V connection also sufficient.
1)
8
Field
9 G 64R
I>, t P I2 > L.O.F
51 32 46 40 7UM511
10
IE>, t
51G
Fig. 105
23. Smallest generators > 1 MW

Notes: MV
52
1
1) Functions 81 und 59 only required
where prime mover can assume excess 3)
speed and voltage regulator may permit
rise of output voltage above upper limit. O/C 7SJ60
2) 51 v.c.
2) Differential relaying options:
– 7UT512: Low-impedance differential
2
I
protection 87 87
IG
– 7UT513: Low-impedance differen-
27 U<
tial 87 with integral restricted ground- 87G
fault protection 87G
1)
– 7VH83: High-impedance differential 81 f> 3
protection 87 (requires class X CTs)
3) 7SJ60 used as voltage-controlled o/c RE Field< 1)
protection. G 64R 59 U>
Function 27 of 7UM511 is used to
switch over to a second, more sensitive Field I>, t P I2> L.O.F. ϑ> 4
setting group.
51 32 46 40 49
IE>, t 7UM511
5
51G
6
Fig. 106
24. Large generator > 1 MW feeding into

a network with isolated neutral Relay ground current input Minimum relay setting: Comments:
connected to: 7
General hints:
– The setting range of the directional Core-balance c.t. 60/1 A:
ground fault protection 67G in the 1 single CT 2 mA
7UM511 relay is 2 – 100 mA. 2 parallel CTs 5 mA
Dependent on the current transformer 3 parallel CTs 8 mA
8
accuracy, a certain minimum setting is 4 parallel CTs 12 mA
required to avoid false operation on load
or transient rush currents:
Three-phase-CTs in 1A CT: ca. 50 mA In general not suitable for
residual (Holmgreen) 5A CT: ca. 200 mA sensitive earth fault
connection protection 9
Three-phase-CTs in 2 – 3‰ of secondary 1A CTs are not
residual (Holmgreen) rated CT current In SEC: recommented in
connection with special this case
factory calibration to 10 – 15 mA with 5A CTs
minimum residual false
10
current (≤ 2 mA)
Fig. 107
– In practice, efforts are generally made to

protect about 90% of the machine wind-
Small grid with isolated neutral
1 ing, measured from the machine termi-
nals. The full ground current for a termi- 3)
nal fault must then be ten times the 52
Grounding
setting value which corresponds to the transformer
fault current of a fault at 10% distance 7XR96 1)
60/1A UN 100 500
from the machine neutral. V 59
2 For the most sensitive setting of 2 mA, 3 3 3 G
we need therefore 20 mA secondary
ground current, corresponding to (60/1) x
20 mA = 1.2 A primary. 52 62
This current may be delivered by the
network ground capacitances if enough RB
3 cables are contained. In this case, the 87
directional ground fault protection (67G)
has to be set to reactive power mea- 7UT512 Field U< U> f
REF< IE
surement (U x I x sin w).
64 67
4
If sufficient capacitive ground current is
not available, a grounding transformer
G F G
27 59 81
with resistive zero-sequence load can be Uo >

installed as ground current source at the 7UM512
59
station busbar. The 67G function has in G
this case to be set to active (wattmetric) 4)
power measurement (U x I x cosw). I>,t I2> P L.O.F
5 The smallest standard grounding trans-
51 46 32 40
former TGAG 3541 has a 20 s short time
rating of PG = 27 kVA.
In a 5kV network, it would deliver:

6 2)
A 3 x PG A 3 x 27,000VA Single-phase VT
IG 20s = ––––––- = –––––––––––– = 9.4 A
UN 5000V
7 corresponding to a relay input current of Fig. 108

9.4 A x 1/60 = 156 mA. This would pro-
vide a 90% protection range with a set-
ting of about 15 mA, allowing the use of Notes:
4 parallel connected core balance CTs.
8 The resistance at the 500V open-delta 1) The standard core-balance CT 7XR96
winding of the grounding transformer has a transformation ratio of 60/1 A.
would then have to be designed for 2) Instead of an open delta winding at the
RG = USEC2 / PG = 500 V2 / 27,000 VA = terminal VT, a single-phase VT at the
9.26 Ohm (27 KW, 20 s). machine neutral could be used as zero-
For a 5 MVA machine and 600/5 A CTs sequence polarizing voltage.
9 with special calibration for minimum re- 3) The grounding transformer is designed
sidual false current, we would get a sec- for a short-time rating of 20 seconds. To
ondary current of IG SEC = 9.4 A /(600/5) = prevent overloading, the load resistor is
78 mA. automatically switched off by a time-de-
With a relay setting of 12 mA, the pro- layed zero-sequence voltage relay (59G
tection range would in this case be + 62) and a contactor (52).
10 12
100 (1- ––) = 85%.
78 4) During the startup time of the generator
with open breaker, the grounding source
is not available. To ensure ground fault
protection during this time interval, an
auxilliary contact of the breaker can be
used to change over the directional
ground fault relay function (67G) to a
zero-sequence voltage detection func-
tion (59G) via a contact converter input.
25. Generator-transformer unit
Notes: 1
1) 100% stator ground-fault protection
based on 20 Hz voltage injection
52 2) Sensitive field ground-fault protection
63 Transf. fault press based on 1 Hz voltage injection
Unit
trans.
3) Only used functions shown, further 2
71 Oil low integrated functions available in each re-
87 lay type (see ”Relay Selection Guide“,
TU
Fig. 43).
51 3
TN
Transf. neut. OC Unit aux.
backup
87U
Unit diff.
51
Oil low
4
Transf.
fault press 71
63
5
Unit
Overvolt. 59 aux.
81N
51 6
Overfreq. TN
78
Trans.
Loss of 24 neut.
sync. OC
Volt/Hz
40 87T
Stator A 7
O.L. Loss of Trans.
field diff.
49S 32
E
Reverse 8
G 87G power Relay
type
Functions 3) Number
of relays
Gen. required
2) diff.
64
R2 64R
7UM511 40 46 59 81N 49 64R 1 9
Field Field 46 21
grd. grd. 59
Neg. Sys. 7UM516 32 21 78 1
seq. backup GN
1) 2)
7UM515 24 51 64
R2
1 10
59 GN
GN
2
Gen. 7UT512 87G 87T and optionally 87 optionally
neut. OV TU 3
51 1)
GN
7UT513 87U 1
7SJ60 51N 51 3
Fig. 109
26. Busbar protection by O/C relays

with reverse interlocking
1
Infeed General hint:
Applicable to distribution busbars without
substantial (< 0.25 x IN) backfeed from the
outgoing feeders
2
Reverse interlocking
3 I>, t0 I>, t
50 51 7SJ60
50N 51N
52
4 t0 = 50 ms
52 52 52
I> I>, t I> I>, t I> I>, t
6 50 51 50 51 50 51
50N 51N 50N 51N 50N 51N
7SJ60 7SJ60 7SJ60

7
8 Fig. 110
10
27. High impedance busbar

protection
1
General hints: Transformer
protection
– Normally used with single busbar
and 1 1/2 breaker schemes
– Requires separate class X current trans-
former cores. All CTs must have the 51 2
same transformation ratio 7VH83
51N
Note:
87 87
1) A varistor is normally applied accross BB S.V.
the relay input terminals to limit the volt-
age to a value safety below the insula- 1) 3
tion voltage of the secondary circuits
(see page 6/70). 86
Alarm
52 52 52
4
Feeder Feeder Feeder

protection protection protection
5
G Load
G
Fig. 111
6
28. Low-impedance busbar protection
Infeed
General hints:
– Preferably used for multiple bus-
Transformer protection
barschemes where an isolator replica is 7
necessary
– The numerical busbar protection 7SS5
50
provides additional breaker failure pro- 50N
tection
– CT transformation ratios can be differ- 52
ent, e.g. 600/1 A in the feeders and
8
2000/1 at the bus tie
– The protection system and the isolator
replica are continuously self-monitored
by the 7SS5
– Feeder protection can be connected to 9
the same CT core. Isolator
52 replica 7SS5
Bus tie 87
protection BB 10
52 52
86
Feeder Feeder
protection protection
BF
Load Back-feed
Fig. 112
Protection Coordination
Protection coordination Peak value of inrush current

1
Relay operating characteristics and their ^ 12.0
setting must be carefully coordinated in IRush
order to achieve selectivity. The aim is ba- ^ 11.0
IN
sically to switch off only the faulted com-
ponent and to leave the rest of the power 10.0
2 system in service in order to minimize sup-
9.0
ply interruptions and to assure stability.
8.0
Sensivity
Protection should be as sensitive as possi- 7.0
3 ble to detect faults at the lowest possible 6.0
current level.
At the same time, however, it should 5.0
remain stable under all permissible load,
overload and through-fault conditions. 4.0
4 3.0
Phase-fault relays
2.0
The pick-up values of phase o/c relays are
normally set 30% above the maximum 1.0
load current, provided that sufficient short-
5 circuit current is available. 2 10 100 400
This practice is recommmended in particu- Rated transformer power [MVA]
lar for mechanical relays with reset ratios
of 0.8 to 0.85.
Time constant of inrush current
Numerical relays have high reset ratios
near 0.95 and allow therefore about 10%
6 lower setting. Nominal power 0.5 . . . 1.0 1.0 . . . 10 >10
Feeders with high transformer and/or [MVA]
motor load require special consideration.
Time constant 0.16 . . . 0.2 0.2 . . . 1.2 1.2 . . . 720
Transformer feeders [s]
7 The energizing of transformers causes
inrush currents that may last for seconds,
depending on their size (Fig. 113).
Fig. 113: Transformer inrush currents, typical data
Selection of the pickup current and as-
signed time delay have to be coordinated
so that the rush current decreases below High-resistance grounding requires much An even more sensitive setting is applied
8 the relay o/c reset value before the set more sensitive setting in the order of in isolated or Peterson-coil-grounded net-
operating time has elapsed. some amperes primary. works where very low ground currents occur
The rush current typically contains only The ground-fault current of motors and with single-phase-to-ground faults.
about 50% fundamental frequency compo- generators, for example, should be limited Settings of 20 mA and less may then be
nent. to values below 10 A in order to avoid iron required depending on the minimum
burning. ground-fault current.
9 Numerical relays that filter out harmonics
Sensitive directional ground-fault relays
and the DC component of the rush current Residual-current relays in the star point
can therefore be set more sensitive. The connection of CTs can in this case not be (integrated in the relays 7SJ512, 7SJ55
inrush current peak values of Fig. 113 will used, in particular with rated CT primary and 7SA511) allow settings as low as 5 mA.
be nearly reduced to one half in this case. currents higher than 200 A. The pickup
value of the zero-sequence relay would
10 Ground-fault relays
in this case be in the order of the error
currents of the CTs.
Residual-current relays enable a much A special zero-sequence CT is therefore
more sensitive setting, as load currents do used in this case as ground current sensor.
not have to be considered (except 4-wire The window-type current transformer
circuits with single-phase load). In solidly 7XR96 is designed for a ratio of 60/1 A.
and low-resistance grounded systems a The detection of 6 A primary would then
setting of 10 to 20% rated load current is require a relay pickup setting of 0.1 A
generally applied. secondary.
Differential relays (87)

Transformer differential relays are normally Time in seconds
set to pickup values between 20 and 30% 1
rated current. The higher value has to be 10000
chosen when the transformer is fitted
with a tap changer. 1000
Restricted ground-fault relays and high-
resistance motor/generator differential re- 100 2
lays are, as a rule, set to about 10% rated
current. 10
Instantaneous o/c protection (50) 1

This is typically applied on the final supply
.1 3
load or on any protective device with suffi-
cient circuit impedance between itself and
the next downstream protective device. .01
The setting at transformers, for example,
must be chosen about 20 to 30% higher .001
than the maximum through-fault current. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4
Current in multplies of full-load amps
Motor feeders
The energizing of motors causes a starting Motor starting current High set instantaneous o/c step
current of initially 5 to 6 times rated cur-
rent (locked rotor current). Locked rotor current Motor thermal limit curve 5
A typical time-current curve for an induction Overload protection characteristic Permissible locked rotor time
motor is shown in Fig. 114.
In the first 100 ms, a fast decaying assy- Fig. 114: Typical motor current-time characteristics
metrical inrush current appears additional-
ly. With conventional relays it was current 6
practice to set the instantaneous o/c step
for short-circuit protection 20 to 30% Time
above the locked-rotor current with a short-
time delay of 50 to 100 ms to override the 51
asymmetrical inrush period.
Numerical relays are able to filter out the 7
asymmetrical current component very fast
so that the setting of an additional time 51 51
delay is no longer applicable.
The overload protection characteristic
should follow the thermal motor character- 8
istic as closely as possible. The adaption is Main
to be made by setting of the pickup value 0.2–0.4 seconds
and the thermal time constant, using the Feeder
data supplied by the motor manufacturer.
Further, the locked-rotor protection timer
has to be set according to the characteristic Current 9
motor value. Maximum feeder fault level
Fig. 115: Coordination of inverse-time relays

Time grading of o/c relays (51)
The selectivity of overcurrent protection
be high for mechanical relays (about 0.1 s) If the same characteristic is used for all re- 10
is based on time grading of the relay oper-
and negligible for numerical relays lays, or when the upstream relay has a
ating characteristics. The relay closer to
(20 ms). steeper characteristic (e.g. very much over
the infeed (upstream relay) is time-delayed
normal inverse), then selectivity is automati-
against the relay further away from the
cally fulfilled at lower currents.
infeed (downstream relay). Inverse-time relays (51)
This is shown in Fig. 116 by the example For the time grading of inverse-time relays,
of definite time o/c relays. the same rules apply in principle as for the
The overshoot times takes into account definite time relays. The time grading is
the fact that the measuring relay contin- first calculated for the maximum fault level
ues to operate due to its inertia, even and then checked for lower current levels
when the fault current is interrupted. This (Fig. 115).
may
1 Operating time
52 M
51
2 M
52 F 52 F
51 51
3 F F
0.2–0.4
Time grading
4
Fault Fault Interruption of
inception detection fault current
5 I> t51F t52F

Circuit-breaker
Set time delay Interruption time
6 Overshoot*
tOS
I> Margin tM
t51M
* also called overtravel or

7 coasting time
t51M – t51F = t52F + tOS + tM
8 Time grading tTG
Example 1
9
Mechanical relays: tOS = 0.15 s
Oil circuit-breaker t52F = 0.10 s tTG = 0.10 + 0.15 + 0.15 = 0.40 s
Safety margin for measuring errors,
etc.: tM = 0.15
10
Example 2
Numerical relays: tOS = 0.02 s

Vacuum breaker: t52F = 0.08 s
tTG = 0.08 + 0.02 + 0.10 = 0.20 s
Safety margin: tM = 0.10 s
Fig. 116: Time grading of overcurrent-time relays
Calculation example
The feeder configuration of Fig. 117 and Example: Time grading of inverse-time relays for a radial feeder
the assigned load and short-circuit currents 1
are given. Load
Numerical o/c relays 7SJ60 with normal A F4 B F3 C F2 13.8 kV/ Fuse: D F1
inverse-time characteristic are applied. 0.4 kV 160 A
The relay operating times dependent on Load
13.8 kV
current can be taken from the diagram or
1.0 MVA
L.V. 75. 2
derived from the formula given in Fig. 118.
51 7SJ60 51 7SJ60 51 7SJ60 5.0%
The IP /IN settings shown in Fig. 117 have Load
been chosen to get pickup values safely
above maximum load current. Station Max. Load Iscc. max.* CT ratio Ip/IN ** Iprim*** Iscc. max.
I /Ip =
This current setting shall be lowest for [A] [A] [A] Iprim
the relay farthest downstream. The relays 3
further upstream shall each have equal or A 300 4500 400/5 1.0 400 11.25
higher current setting. 2690 200/5 1.1 220 12.23
B 170
The time multiplier settings can now be
calculated as follows: C 50 1395 100/5 0.7 70 19.93
Station C: D – 523 – – – – 4
*) Iscc.max. = Maximum short-circuit current
■ For coordination with the fuses, we
** Ip/IN = Relay current multiplier setting
consider the fault in location F1. *** Iprim = Primary setting current corresponding to Ip/IN
The short-circuit current related to
13.8 kV is 523 A. Fig. 117
This results in 7.47 for I/IP at the o/c 5
relay in location C.
■ With this value and TP = 0.05 The setting values for the relay at station B
are herewith t [s]
we derive from Fig. 118
an operating time of tA = 0.17 s ■ Current tap: IP /IN = 1.1 100
This setting was selected for the o/c relay ■ Time multiplier TP = 0.11 6
to get a safe grading time over the fuse on Given these settings, we can also check 50
the transformer low-voltage side. the operating time of the relay in B for a 40
The setting values for the relay at station C close-in fault in F3: 30
are therefore: The short-circuit current increases in this Tp [s]
20
■ Current tap: IP /IN = 0.7 case to 2690 A (see Fig. 117). The corre-
sponding I/IP value is 12.23.
7
■ Time multipler: TP = 0.05 10
■ With this value and the set value of 3.2
Station B: TP = 0.11 5
The relay in B has a back-up function for we obtain again from Fig. 118 4
the relay in C. an operating time of 0.3 s. 1.6
3
The maximum through-fault current of 8
1.395 A becomes effective for a fault in Station A: 2 0.8
location F2. ■ We add the time grading interval of
For the relay in C, we obtain an operating 0.3 s and find the desired operating time 1 0.4
time of 0.11 s (I/IP = 19.9). tA = 0.3 + 0.3 = 0.6 s.
We assume that no special requirements
for short operating times exist and can
Following the same procedure as for the 0.50
0.4 0.2 9
relay in station B we obtain the following
therefore choose an average time grading values for the relay in station A: 0.3
interval of 0.3 s. The operating time of the 0.1
■ Current tap: IP /IN = 1.0 0.2
relay in B can then be calculated:
■ Time multiplier: TP = 0.17
■ tB = 0.11 + 0.3 = 0.41 s 0.05
■ Value of IP /IN = 1395 A = 6.34
■ For the close-in fault at location F4 we 0.1 10
obtain an operating time of 0.48 s.
220 A
0.05
see Fig. 117.
■ With the operating time 0.41 s
2 4 6 8 10 20
and IP /IN = 6.34, Normal inverse I/Ip [A]
we can now derive TP = 0.11 0.14
from Fig. 118. t= . Tp [s]
(I/Ip)0.02 – 1
Fig. 118: Normal inverse time-characteristic of

relay 7SJ60
1
= 16.000 kA
Iscc = 1395 A
Iscc = 2690 A
Imax = 4500 A
I – 0.4 kVmax
Setting range Setting

IN
A
t [min]
t [s]
2 400/5 A I>> Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xIn Ip = 1.0 xIn

100 I>, t 7SJ600 Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s Tp = 0.17 s
I>>= 0.1 – 25. xIn I>> = ∞
5
1 52
2
3 Bus-B
10
5 200/5 A I>> Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xIn Ip = 1.1 xIn
2 I>, t 7SJ600 Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s Tp = 0.11 s
4 I>> = 0.1 – 25. xIn I>> = ∞
1 52
5 IA>,t
Bus-C
2 IB>,t
100/5 A Ip = 0.10 – 4.00 xIn Ip = 0.7 xIn
5 .1 IC>,t I>>
5 I>, t 7SJ600 Tp = 0.05 – 3.2 s Tp = 0.05 s
I>> = 0.1 – 25. xIn I>> = ∞
2 52
.01
6
5 13.8/0.4 KV
fuse
2 TR 1.0 MVA
5.0%
.001
7 10 2 5 100 2 5 1000 2 5 10 4 fuse VDE 160 HRC fuse 160 A
13.80 kV
I [A] 0.40 kV
1000 2 5 10 4 2 5 10 5 2
8
Fig. 119: O/c time grading diagram
The normal way Note:

9 To prove the selectivity over the whole
To simplify calculations, only inverse-time
characteristics have been used for this ex-
range of possible short-circuit currents, it is ample. About 0.1 s shorter operating times
normal practice to draw the set operating could have been reached for high-current
curves in a common diagram with double faults by additionally applying the instanta-
log scales. These diagrams can be manual- neous zones I>> of the 7SJ60 relays.
10 ly calculated and drawn point by point or
constructed by using templates.
Today computer programs are also availa-
ble for this purpose. Fig. 119 shows the re-
lay coordination diagram for the example
selected, as calculated by the Siemens
program CUSS (computer-aided protective
grading).
Coordination of o/c relays with fuses

and low-voltage trip devices
The procedure is similar to the above de- 1
scribed grading of o/c relays. Usually a Time MV
time interval between 0.1 and 0.2 seconds
Inverse relay 51
is sufficient for a safe time coordination.
Very and extremely inverse characteristics
are often more suitable than normal in- 2
verse curves in this case. Fig. 120 shows Other Fuse
typical examples. consumers
Simple consumer-utility interrupts use a
power fuse on the primary side of the sup-
ply transformers (Fig. 120a).
In this case, the operating characteristic of n 3
the o/c relay at the infeed has to be coordi- a
LV bus
nated with the fuse curve.
Very inverse characteristics may be used 0.2 seconds
with expulsion-type fuses (fuse cutouts) Fuse
while extremly inverse versions adapt bet-
ter to current limiting fuses. a) 4
In any case, the final decision should be Maximum fault available at HV bus Current
made by plotting the curves in the log-log
coordination diagram.
Electronic trip devices of LV breakers have
Time
long-delay, short-delay and instantaneous MV bus 5
zones.
Numerical o/c relays with one inverse time 50
o/c relay 51
and two definite-time zones can be closely
adapted (Fig. 120b). I1>, t1
Secondary I2>, t2 n
a
breaker
0.2 seconds LV bus 7
I>>
b)
Maximum fault level at MV bus Current 8
Fig. 120: Coordination of an o/c relay with an MV fuse and a low-voltage breaker trip device
9
10
Grading of zone times

The first zone normally operates unde-
1 Operating
layed. For the grading of the time intervals
time
of the second and third zones, the same
Z3A rules as for o/c relays apply (see Fig. 116).
t3 For the quadrilateral characteristics (relays
Z2A Z2B 7SA511 and 7SA513) only the reactance
2 t2
values (X values) have to be considered
Z1A Z1B Z1C for the reach setting. The setting of the
t1
R values should cover the line resistance
~ ZLA-B ZLB-C ZLC-D
and possible arc or fault resistances. The
arc resistance can be roughly estimated
A B C D Load as follows:
3 Z1A = 0.85 • ZLA-B Load Load
Z2A = 0.85 • (ZLA-B+Z1B)

Z3A = 0.85 • (ZLA-B+Z2B) IArc x 2kV/m
RArc =
Iscc
Min
4 Fig. 121: Grading of distance zones
IArc = arc length in m
Iscc Min = minimum short-circuit current
X Fig. 123
D
5
X3A ■ Typical settings of the ratio R/X are:
C
– Short lines and cables (≤ 10 km):
X2A R/X = 2 to 10
B – Medium line lengths < 25 km: R/X = 2
6 – Longer lines 25 to 50 km: R/X = 1
X1A
Shortest feeder protectable by

distance relays
7 The shortest feeder that can be protected
by underreach distance zones without the
need for signaling links depends on the
shortest settable relay reactance.
A R1A R2A R3A R
8
XPrimary Minimum =
VTratio
= XRelay Min x [Ohm]
CTratio
9 Fig. 122: Operating characteristic of Siemens distance relays 7SA511 and 7SA513
XPrim.Min [Ohm]
Coordination of distance relays Where measured line or cable impedances Imin = [km]
are available, the reach setting may also be X’Line [Ohm/km]
The reach setting of distance times must
extended to 90%. The second and third
take into account the limited relay accuracy
zones have to keep a safety margin of
10 including transient overreach (5% accord-
about 15 to 20% to the corresponding
Fig. 124
ing to IEC 60255-6), the CT error (1% for
zones of the following lines. The shortest
class 5P and 3% for class 10P) and a secu-
following line has always to be considered The shortest setting of the numerical
rity margin of about 5%. Further, the line
(Fig. 121). Siemens relays is 0.05 ohms for 1 A
parameters are normally only calculated,
not measured. This is a further source of As a general rule, the second zone should relays, corresponding to 0.01 ohms for
errors. at least reach 20% over the next station to 5 A relays.
ensure back-up for busbar faults, and the This allows distance protection of distribu-
A setting of 80–85% is therefore common
third zone should cover the largest follow- tion cables down to the range of some
practice; 80% is used for mechanical relays
ing line as back-up for the line protection. 500 meters.
while 85% can be used for the more accu-
rate numerical relays.
Breaker failure protection setting

Most digital relays of this guide provide the
BF protection as an integral function. The
62
BF
1
initiation of the BF protection by the inter-
nal protection functions then takes place
via software logic. However, the BF protec-
tion function may also be initiated from
outside via binary inputs by an alternate 2
protection. In this case the operating time 50
of intermediate relays (BFI time) may have BF
to be considered. Finally, the tripping of A
N
the infeeding breakers needs auxiliary re- Breaker failure protection, P1 D
lays which add a small time delay (BFT) to logic circuit O 3
the overall fault clearing time. R
This is in particular the case with 1-and-
P2
1/2-breaker or ring bus arrangements P1 : primary P2 : alternate
where a separate breaker failure relay protection protection
(7SV600 or 7SV512) is used per breaker
(see application example 10).
Fig. 125 4
The deciding criterion of BF protection
time coordination is the reset time of the
current detector (50BF) which must not be
exceeded under any condition of current
interruption. The reset times specified in Fault incidence BFI =
breaker failure
the Siemens digital relay manuals are valid Normal interrupting time initiation time 5
for the worst-case condition: interruption (intermediate
of a fully offset short-circuit current and Current relays, if any)
low current pick-up setting (0.1 to 0.2 detector
(50 BF) BFT =
times rated CT current). Protect. Breaker inter. reset time Margin breaker failure
The reset time is 1 cycle for EHV relays tripping time
(7SA513, 7SV512) and 1.5 to 2 cycles for time time (auxilary relays,
6
(1~) (2,5~)
distribution type relays (7SJ***). (1~) (2~) [2,5~] if any)
[2~] [2~]
Fig. 126 shows the time chart for a typical [4~]
breaker failure protection scheme. The
stated times in parentheses apply for
(5~) (2~)
transmission system protection and the 0,5~ [8~] 0,5~ [4~] 7
times in square brackets for distribution
system protection.
BFI BF timer (F) (62BF) BFT Adjacent
breaker
Total breaker failure interrupting time int. time
(9~) [15~]
8
Fig. 126
10
High-impedance differential Differential relay Stability with external faults
protection: Verification of design The differential relay must be a high- This check is made by assuming an exter-
1 impedance relay designed as sensitive nal fault with maximum through-fault
current relay (7VH80/83: 20 mA) with current and full saturation of the CT in the
The following design series resistor. If the series resistor is faulted feeder. The saturated CT ist then
data must be established: integrated in the relay, the setting values only effective with its secondary winding
may be directly calibrated in volts, as with resistance RCT, and the appearing relay volt-
2 CT data the relays 7VH80/83 (6 to 60 V or 24 to age VR corresponds to the voltage drop of
The CTs must all have the same ratio and 240 V). the infeeding currents (through-fault
should be of low leakage flux design ac- current) at RCT and RL. The current at the
Sensitivity
cording to Class TPS of IEC 44-6 (Class X relay must under this condition safely stay
of BS 3938). The excitation characteristic For the relay to operate in case of an inter- below the relay pickup value.
and the secondary winding resistance are nal fault, the primary current must reach a In practice, the wiring resistances RL may
3 to be provided by the manufacturer. minimum value to supply the set relay not be equal. In this case, the worst
The knee-point voltage of the CT is required pickup current (IR-set), the varistor leakage condition with the highest relay voltage
to be designed at least for two times the current (Ivar) and the magnetizing currents (corresponding to the highest relay current)
relay pick-up voltage to assure dependable of all parallel-connected CTs (n·ImR). must be sought by considering all possible
operation with internal faults. Low relay voltage setting and CTs with low external feeder faults.
magnetizing demand therefore increase
4 the protection sensitivity.
Setting
The setting is always a trade-off between
1 2 3 n sensitivity and stability. A higher voltage
Voltage limitation by a varistor setting leads to enhanced through-fault
is required if: stability, but, also to higher CT magnetizing
5 RCT RCT RCT RCT
and varistor leakage currents resulting con-
sequently in a higher primary pickup cur-
VRmax = 2 2VKN (VF –VKN) > 2kV
rent.
RL RL RL RL IFmax Through A higher voltage setting also requires a
with VF = (RCT + 2·RL + RR) higher knee-point voltage of the CTs and
N
therefore greater size of the CTs.
6 Fig. 129 A sensitivity of 10 to 20% IN is normal for
motor and transformer differential protec-
RR tion, or for restricted ground-fault protection.
Varistor
With busbar protection a pickup value
87B Calculation example: ≥ 50 % IN is normally applied.
An increased pickup value can be achie-
7 Given: n = 8 feeders
ved by connecting a resistor in parallel to
Fig. 127 N = 600/1 A the relay.
VKN = 500 V
Varistor
RCT = 4 Ohm
Sensitivity: ImR = 30 mA (at relay setpoint) Voltage limitation by a varistor is needed if
8 peak voltages near or above the insulation
IFmin = N·(IRset + Ivar + n·ImR) RL = 3 Ohm (max.) voltage (2 kV) are to be expected. A limita-
Stability: IRset = 20 mA tion to 1500 V rms is then recommended.
RR RR = 10 kOhm This can be checked for the maximum in-
IFThrough max < N· ·I ternal fault current by applying the formula
RL + RCT Rset IVar = 50 mA (at relay setpoint)
shown for VR-max.
N = CT ratio
9 Sensitivity: A restricted ground-fault protection may
IRset = Set relay pickup current normally not require a varistor, but, a bus-
IVar = Varistor spill current IFmin = N·(IRset + Ivar + n·ImR) bar protection in general does.
ImR = CT magnetizing current at The electrical varistor characteristic can be
IFmin = 600 ·(0.02 + 0.05 + 8·0.03) expressed as V=K·IB. K and B are the varis-
relay pickup voltage 1
tor constants.
10 V IFmin = 186 A (31% IN)
VKN Stability:
VKN =CT knee
point voltage RR Relay K B Varistor
IFmaxThrough < N· ·I
RL + RCT Rset setting type
VR =RR·IRset
VR VKN ≥ 2·VR IFmax Through < 600 · 10,000 ·0.02 V rms
1 3+4
≤125 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256
IFmax Through < 17 kA (28·IN)
ImR Im 125–240 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088
Fig. 128 Fig. 130 Fig. 131
Introduction
State-of-the-art
Modern protection and substation control
uses microprocessor technology and serial Traditional protection and substation control
1
communication to upgrade substation op-
eration, to enhance reliability and to reduce
overall life cycle cost.
The traditional conglomeration of often to-
tally different devices such as relays, me- To network control center 2
ters, switchboards and RTUs is replaced by
a few multifunctional, intelligent devices
of uniform design. And, instead of exten-
sive parallel wiring (centralized solution,
Fig. 132), only a few serial links are used
(decentralized solution, Fig. 133). 3
Control of the substation takes place with
menu-guided procedures at a central VDU
workplace. Alarm annunciation
Remote terminal unit and local control
4
Marshalling rack 6
Approx. 20 to
40 cores per bay
8
F F
Control Monitoring Protection 10

Mimic display Indication lamps e.g.
Pushbuttons Measuring instruments Overcurrent relays
Position indicators Transducers Ground-fault relays
Interposing relays Terminal blocks Reclosing relays
Local/remote switch Miniature circuit breakers Auxiliary relays
Fig. 132: Central structure of traditional protection and control
Introduction
1 Coordinated protection and substation control system
2
Control center
3
Compact central PC
control unit *
including RTU functions
4
5
Printer
6
Profibus Substation LAN
**
8
9
Control Protection Combined protection
I/O unit relay and control relay
Low-voltage compartment
Shown with
10 open door
of the medium-voltage
switchgear
* The compact central control unit can be located in a separate cubicle or

directly in the low-voltage compartment of the switchgear
Fig. 133: Decentralized structure of modern protection and control
Introduction
Substation control and The SICAM family offers of the following – Central process connection
protection system options: – PLC functions
For numerical substation control and pro- ■ SICAM SAS, the substation automation – Communication with Control Center 1
tection system applications, two different system with the following features: ■ SICAM PCC, the PC-based Substation
systems are available: – Principal function: Control System with the following fea-
■ SINAUT LSA substation automation tures:
■ SICAM – Decentralized and centralized process – Principal function: local substation su-
By virtue of their different functions and connection pervision and control 2
specific advantages, the two systems cov- – Local control and monitoring with ar- – Decentralized process connection
er different applications. This means that it chive function – LAN/WAN communication with
is possible to configure an optimum sys- – Communication with the System IEC 60870-6 TASE.2
tem for every application. Control Center – Flexible communication
SINAUT LSA is typically used primarily for ■ SICAM RTU, the telecontrol system with – Linkage to Office® products. 3
medium-voltage and high-voltage applica- central process connection and the fol-
tions in power supply utilities. lowing features:
The principal use for SICAM products is – Principal function: information commu-
currently in medium-voltage applications nication
for power suppliers and industry. 4
Other features in which they differ are Principal application aspects of SINAUT LSA and SICAM
summarized in Fig. 134.
SINAUT LSA substation control system SINAUT LSA SICAM

Central and
Since 1986, SINAUT LSA systems have decentral 5
proved themselves in practice in over 1500 connection SAS RTU PCC
substations. The SINAUT LSA substation
automation system was the first digital
system to have integrated all the following Telecontrol data concentrator +++ ++
functions in a single equipment family:
(connection of telecontrol remote
stations) 6
■ Telecontrol
■ Local Control Telecontrol communication via + + +++
■ Monitoring
WAN with TCP/IP
■ Automation and Telecontrol communication using +++ +++ +++
■ Protection standard protocols IEC 870-5-101,
DNP3.0, SINAUT 8FW 7
SINAUT LSA has significantly extended the
scope of performance and functionality of Supplementing of project-specific + ++ ++ +++
conventional secondary equipment. It is telecontrol protocols
design and operation-friendly to a very con-
siderable extent. Supply of existing telecontrol +++ + + +
SINAUT LSA is a system matched to re-
protocols 8
quirements – from the hardware to the PC IED link using IEC 870-5-103 +++ +++ ++
tools – and is tailored in optimum form to +++ +++
the function of numerical substation con- IED link using DNP3.0
trol and protection systems. Expansion of existing +++ ++(1) ++(1)
Fig. 134 shows the principal application SINAUT LSA substations 9
aspects of the SINAUT LSA substation
Expansion of existing SICAM +++ +++ +++
control and protection system in compari- substations
son with the SICAM systems.
Incorporation in SIMATIC + +++ +++ +
SICAM Substation Automation System
automation solutions 10
Linkage of PROFIBUS DP-IEDs +++ ++ ++
Units of the SICAM family have been in
service since 1996. The SICAM system is Addition of project-specific IED + + +++
based on SIMATIC*) and PC standard protocols
modules. SICAM possesses an open com-
munication system with standardized inter- Uncomplicated, low-cost design + ++ +++ +++
faces. Thus, SICAM is a flexible system
capable of uncomplicated further develop- (1)
Linkage as telecontrol remote station +++ Ideally suitable
ment. IED – Intelligent Electronic Device ++ Very suitable
+ Suitable
*)Siemens PLCs and Industrial Automation Systems.
For detailed information see: Catalog ST 70, Fig. 134: Table shows the principal application aspects of the SICAM and SINAUT LSA system families.
Siemens Components for Totally Integrated Automation.
SINAUT LSA – Overview
Technical proceedings
System Control Center Engineering
The first coordinated protection and sub-
1 station control system SINAUT LSA was
Analysis
commissioned in 1986 and continuously
further developed over subsequent years.
It now features the following main charac-
teristics: Operator’s LSA
desk PROCESS Time signal
2 ■ Coordinated system structure
■ Optical communication network
(star configuration) VDU Modem
■ High processing power
(32-bit µP technology) Station Event Logger
level Modem
3 ■ Standardized serial interfaces and com-
munication protocols
■ Uniform design of all components
■ Complete range of protection and con- ”Master Unit“ (i. e. 6MB55)
trol functions
1… …n
4 ■ Comprehensive user-software support
packages.
Currently (1999) over 1500 systems are in
Bay Control Unit Bay Protection 7S
successful operation on all voltage levels Bay 6 MB 524 including
up to 400 kV. level interlocking
5 System structure
and scope of functions
The SINAUT LSA system performs super-
visory local control, switchgear interlock- Switchyard
ing, bay and station protection, synchro-
Serial Parallel
6 nizing, transformer tap-changer control,
switching sequence programs, event and
Fig. 135: Distributed structure of coordinated protection and control system SINAUT LSA
fault recording, telecontrol, etc.
It consists of the independent subsystems
(Fig. 135): Data sharing between protection and con- ing: local feeder control, overcurrent and
■ Supervisory control 6MB5** trol via the so-called informative interface overload protection, breaker-failure protec-
7 ■ Protection 7S*** according to IEC 60 870-5-103 is restricted tion and metering.
to noncritical measuring or event recording
Normally, switchgear interlocking is inte- functions. The protection units, for exam-
grated as a software program in the super- ple, deliver r.m.s. values of currents, volt- Supervisory control
visory control system. Local bay control is ages, power, instantaneous values for os- The substation is monitored and controlled
implemented in the bay-dedicated I/O con- cillographic fault recording and time-tagged from the operator‘s desk (Fig. 136). The
8 trol units 6MB524. operating events for fault reporting. VDU shows overview diagrams and com-
For complex substations with multiple bus- Besides the high data transmission securi- plete details of the switchgear including
bars, however, the interlocking function ty, the system also provides self-monitor- measurands on a color display. All event
can also be provided as an independent ing of individual components. and alarm annunciations are selectable in
backup system (System 8TK). The distributed structure also makes the the form of lists. The control procedure is
9 Communication and data exchange be- SINAUT LSA system attractive for refur- menu-guided and uses mouse and keyboard.
tween components is performed via serial bishment programs or extensions, where The operation is therefore extremely user-
data links. Optical-fiber connections are conventional secondary equipment has to friendly.
preferred to ensure EMI compatibility. be integrated.
The communication structure of the con- It is general practice to provide protection Automatic functions
trol system is designed as a hierarchical of HV and EHV substations as separate, Apart from the switchgear interlocking pro-
10 star configuration. It operates in the polling self-contained relays that can communi- vided, a series of automatic functions en-
procedure with a fixed assignment of the cate with the control system, but function sure effective and secure system operation.
master function to the central unit. The otherwise completely independently. Automatic switching sequences, such as
data transmission mode is asynchronous, At lower voltage levels, however, higher changing of busbars, can be user-pro-
half-duplex, protected with a hamming integrated solutions are accepted for cost grammed and started locally or remotely.
distance d = 4, and complies with the reasons. Furthermore, the synchronizing function
IEC Standard 60 870-5. For distribution-type substations combined has been integrated into the system soft-
Each subsystem can operate fully in stand- protection and control feeder units (e.g. ware and is available as an option.
alone mode even in the event of loss of 7SJ63) are available which integrate all
communication. necessary functions of one feeder, includ-
The synchronizing function runs on the rel-

evant 6MB524 bay control units. The per-
formance of these functions corresponds 1
to modern digital stand-alone units. The
advantages of the integrated solution,
however, are:
■ External auxiliary relay circuits for the
selection of measurands are no longer 2
applicable.
■ Adaptive parameter setting becomes
possible from local or remote control
levels.
High processing power
3
The processing power of the central con-
trol unit has been enormously increased
by the introduction of the 32-bit µP tech-
nology. This permits, on the one hand, a
more compact design and provides, on the
other hand, sufficient processing reserve 4
for the future introduction of additional
functions. Fig. 136: Digital substation control, operator desk. Control of a 400 kV substation (double control unit)
Static memories
A decisive step in the direction of user
friendliness has been made with the imple-
5
mentation of large nonvolatile Flash EPROM
memories. The system parameters can be
loaded via a serial port at the front panel of
the central unit. Bay level parameters are
automatically downloaded. 6
Analog value processing
The further processing of raw measured
data, such as the calculation of maximum,
minimum or effective values, with as-
signed real time, is contained as standard 7
function.
A Flash EPROM mass storage can option-
ally be provided to record measured values,
fault events or fault oscillograms.The stored
information can be read out locally or re-
motely by a telephone modem connection. 8
Further data evaluation (harmonic analysis,
etc.) is then possible by means of a special
PC program (LSA PROCESS).
Compact design Fig. 137: Switchgear-integrated control Fig. 138: View of a low-voltage compartment
and protection
9
A real reduction in space and cost has
been achieved by the creation of compact
I/O and central units. The processing hard- Switchgear interlocking The interlocking function ensures fail-safe
ware is enclosed in metallic cases with and local control switching and personal safety down to the
EMI-proof terminals and optical serial inter- lowest control level, i.e. directly at the
With the introduction of the bay control
faces. All units are type tested according switchpanel, even when supervisory con- 10
unit 6MB524, the switchgear interlocking
to the latest IEC standards. trol is not available.
and the local control function have been
In this way, the complete control and pro- The bay control unit 6MB524 uses code-
integrated completely into the SINAUT
tection equipment can be directly integrat- words to protect the switchgear from un-
LSA station control system. That means
ed into the MV or HV switchgear authorized operation. With these code-
that there is no technical need for an addi-
(Fig. 137, 138). words, the authorization for local switch-
tional switchgear interlocking like the 8TK
ing and unlocked local switching can be
system, because the SINAUT LSA system
reached. The bay-to-bay interlocking condi-
has the same reliability according to the
tions are checked in the SINAUT LSA cen-
testing of interlocking conditions. However,
tral unit. Each 6MB524 bay control unit has
the 8TK system is still available for the case
an optical fiber link to this central unit.
that an interlocking system with seperate
hardware and software is required.
Numerical protection
A complete range of fully digital (numeri-
1 cal) relays is available (see chapter Power
System Protection 6/8 and following System Management
pages). control terminal
They all have a uniform design compatible center
with the control units (Fig. 139). This ap-
2 plies to the hardware as well as to the soft-
ware structure and the operating proce- Modem
dures. Metallic standard cases, IEC 60255-
tested, with EMI-secure terminals, ensure
an uncomplicated application comparable VF Modem
to mechanical relays. The LCD display and
3 setting keypad are integrated. Additionally
a RS232 port is provided on the front panel Remote control Telephone network
for the connection of a PC as an HMI.
The rear terminal block contains an optical-
fiber interface for the data communication VF Modem
with the SINAUT LSA control system.
4 The relays are normally linked directly to Substation
the relevant I/O control unit at the bay level
level. Connection to the central control
system unit is, however, also possible. ERTU
The numerical relays are multifunctional
5 and contain, for example, all the necessary
protection functions for a line feeder or Printer Operator
transformer. At higher voltage levels, addi- Marshalling rack terminal
tional, main or back-up relays are applied.
The new relay generation has extended
memory capacity for fault recording (5 sec- Bay level Interposing relays,
6 onds, 1 ms resolution) and nonvolatile transducers
memory for important fault information.
The serial link between protection and con-
trol uses standard protocols in accordance Existing
with IEC 60870-5-103. Extended switchyard
switchyard
7 In this way, supplier compatibility and
interchangeability of protection devices is
achieved. Fig. 140: Enhanced remote terminal unit 6MB55, application options
Enhanced remote terminal units Communication with control centres

8
For substations with existing remote ter- The SINAUT LSA system uses protocols
minal units, an enhancement towards the that comply with IEC Standard 60 870-5. In
decentralized SINAUT LSA performance many cases an adaption to existing propri-
level is feasible. etary protocols is necessary, when the sys-
The telecontrol system 6MB55 replaces tem control center has been supplied by
9 outdated remote terminal units (Fig. 140). another manufacturer.
Conventional RTUs are connected to the For this purpose, an extensive protocol li-
switchgear via interposing relays and brary has been developed (approx. 100
measuring transducers with a marshalling protocol variants). Further protocols can be
rack as a common interface. provided on demand.
10 The centralized version SINAUT LSA can
be directly connected to this interface. The
totally parallel wiring can be left in its origi-
nal state.
In this manner, it is possible to enhance
the RTU function and to include substation
monitoring and control with the same
performance level as the decentralized
Fig. 139: Numerical protection, standard design
SINAUT LSA system.
Upgrading of existing substations can thus
be achieved with a minimum of cost and
effort.
Engineering system LSATOOLS

In parallel with the upgrading of the central 1
unit hardware, a novel parameterizing and
documentation system LSATOOLS has
been developed. It uses modern graphical
presentation management methods,
including pull-down menus and multiwin-
Parameterizing Documentation
dowing. 2
LSATOOLS enables the complete configu-
ration, parameterization and documentation
of the system to be carried out on a PC
Engineering system workstation. It ensures that a consistent
database for the project is maintained from
design to commissioning (Fig. 141). 3
Parameter data Documentation The system parameters, generated by
LSATOOLS, can be serially loaded into the
Flash EPROM memory of the central control
unit and will then be automatically down-
Fig. 141: Engineering system LSATOOLS loaded to the bay level devices 4
(Fig. 142).
Care has been taken to ensure that chang-
es and expansions are possible without
LSATOOLS requiring a complete retest of the system.
Network control center Because of the object-oriented structure of
parameterization station
LSATOOLS, it is easily possible for the sys- 5
Documentation tem engineer to add new bays with all
necessary information.
Master unit
6
Loading of
parameters 7
Downloading of parameters
during startup 8
PC inputs
Input/output
units
10
Fig. 142: PC-aided parameterization of SINAUT LSA with LSATOOLS and downloading of parameters
SINAUT LSA – Distributed Structure
In the SINAUT LSA substation control sys-

tem the functions can be distributed be-
1 tween station and bay control levels.
The input/output devices have the Higher-level Station control center Central evaluation
following tasks on the bay control level: control system station (PC)
■ Signal acquisition
■ Acquisition of measured values and Telecontrol channel Telephone channel
2 metering data
■ Monitoring the execution of control
commands, e.g. for
– Control of switchgear
– Transformer tap changing Normal time
3 – Setting of Peterson coils

Data processing, such as Central control unit 6MB51
– Limit monitoring of measured values,
including initiation of responses to Station
limit violations level
1 n
– Calculation of derived operational
4 measured values (e.g. P, Q, cos ϕ )
and/or operational parameters (for ex- Busbar and
ample r.m.s. values, slave pointer) breaker failure
from the logged instantaneous values protection 7SS5
for current and voltage
5 – Deciding how much information to
transmit to the control master unit in
each polling cycle
– Generation of group signals and deriv-
ing of signals internally, e.g. from
self-monitoring
6 ■ Switchgear-related automation tasks
Bay Bay control unit Protection relays
level 6MB524 7S/7U
– Switching sequences in response to
switching commands or to process
events
– Synchronization
7 ■ Local control and operation
(only bay control unit 6MB524): Substation
– Display of actual bay status (single
line diagram) Serial interface Parallel interface
– Local control of circuit-breaker and
8 disconnectors
Fig. 143: SINAUT LSA protection and substation control system system
– Display of measurement values and
event recording
■ Transmission of data from numerical pro- functions of the numerical protection re-
stations together with overcurrent/overload
tection relays to the control master unit relays 7SJ60 and digital measuring trans- lays can be used. These can also provide
9 ■ Local display of status and measured ducers 7KG60. (see application example, local indication of measuring values.
values. Fig. 165). The local bay control is intended to be per-
All further bay control devices contain an formed by the existing, switchgear-integrated
Input/output devices optic serial interface for connection to the mechanical control.
A complete range of devices is available to central control unit, and an RS232 serial
interface on the front side for connection Compact devices 6MB522/523
10 meet the particular demands concerning
of an operating PC. Further, integral dis- They provide a higher number of signal
process signal capacity and functionality
(see Fig. 149). All units are built up in mod- plays for measuring values and LEDs for inputs and outputs, and contain additional
ern 7XP20 housings and can be directly status indication are provided. measuring functions. One measuring value
installed in the low-voltage compartments or other preprocessed information can be
Minicompact device 6MB525 displayed on the 2-row, 16-character alpha-
of the switchgear or in separate cubicles.
The smallest device 6MB525 is designed It contains signal inputs and command out- numeric display.
as a low-cost version and contains only puts for substation control. Analog measur- If local control is required, the bay control
control functions. It is provided with an ing inputs, where needed, have to be pro- unit 6MB524 is the right choice.
RS485-wired serial interface and is normal- vided by additional measuring transducers,
ly used for simple distribution-type sub- type 7KG60. Alternatively, the measuring
Bay control unit 6MB524

This bay control device can be delivered in
five versions, depending on the peripheral
1
requirements.
It provides all control and measuring func-
tions needed for switchgear bays up to the
EHV level.
Switching status, measuring values and 2
alarms are indicated on a large graphic dis-
play. Measuring instruments can therefore
be widely dispensed with.
Bay control is, in this case, performed by
the integrated keypad. The synchronizing
function is included in the software. 3
Combined protection
and control device 7SJ531
This fully integrated device provides all pro-
tection, control and measuring functions
Fig. 144: Minicompact Fig. 145: Compact I/O device Fig. 146: Combined protection and control device 4
for simple line/cable, motor or transformer
I/O device 6MB525 6MD62 7SJ63
feeders. Protection includes overcurrent,
overload and ground-fault protection, as
well as breaker-failure protection, auto-
reclosure and motor supervision functions
(see page 6/27). 5
Only one unit is needed per feeder. Space,
assembly and wiring costs can therefore
be considerably reduced.
Measured value display and local bay con-
trol is performed in the same way as with
the bay control unit 6MB524 with a large 6
display and a keypad.
Combined protection and control devices

7SJ61, 7SJ62, 7SJ63 and bay control unit
6MD63 (SIPROTEC 4 series)
7
These new SIPROTEC 4 devices have been
available since December 1998. With a
large graphical display and ergonomically
designed keypad, they offer new possibili-
ties for bay control and protection. Via the Fig. 147: Compact I/O unit with Fig. 148: Combined protection and
IEC 60870-5-103 interface, connection to local (bay) control 6MB5240-0 control device 7SJ531 8
the substation control system SINAUT LSA
is handled. The protection devices include
overcurrent, over/undervoltage and motor
protection functions (see page 6/27).
The smaller 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 devices are 9
delivered with an alphanumerical display
with 4 lines of text for displaying of meas-
urement values, alarms, metering values
and status of switching devices.
The 7SJ63 and 6MD63 units include a
large illuminated graphic display for a clearly 10
visible single-line diagram of the switchgear,
alarm lists, measured and metered values
as well as status messages. With the inte-
grated key switches, the user authorization
is regulated.
For complete description of the new
SIPROTEC 4 devices, refer to the protection
chapter (page 6/8).
Design Type Commands Signal inputs Analog inputs Components

1 Double Single Double Single Direct Connection to
connection measure
to transformer transducer
Minicompact1) 6MB525 2 – 6 – – – Double commands and alarms

2 configurable also as ”single“
Compact1) 6MB523 1 – 3 5 1xI – For simple switchgear cubicles

6MB522-0 3 1 3 5 2 x U, 1 x I 2 with one switching device
6MB522-1 6 2 6 10 3 x U, 3 x I –
6MB522-2 6 2 6 10 4 x U, 2 x I 2 with P, Q calculation
3
Compact with 6MB5240-0 4 1 8 – 2 x U, 1 x I 1 High-end bay control for
local (bay) control -1 6 1 12 – 3 x U, 3 x I 2 HV and EHV
and large display -2 8 2 16 – 3 x U, 3 x I 2 Double commands and alarms
also usable as ”single“
4 -3 20 5 40 – 9 x U, 6 x I 5
-4 12 3 24 – 6 x U, 3 x I 2
Combined control 7SJ531 1 – – – 3 x U, 3 x I Double commands and alarms
and protection also usable as ”single“
device with
5 local (bay) control
Compact with local 6MD631 4 – 5 1 4 x I, 3 x U – Bay control units in new
bay control 6MD632 5 + 43) 1 12 – 4 x I, 3 x U – design, optimized for medium-
(SIPROTEC 4 design voltage switchgear with
with large graphic 6MD633 5 + 43) 1 10 – 4 x I, 3 x U 2 11/2-pole control
6 display) 2) (max. 7 switching devices).
2-pole control also possible
6MD634 3 + 43) – 10 – – – (max. 4 switching devices).
6MD635 7 + 83) – 18 1 4 x I, 3 x U –
Double commands and alarms
7 + 83) also usable as ”single“
7 6MD636 – 16 1 4 x I, 3 x U 2
6MD637 4 + 83) 1 16 1 – –
Combined control 7SJ610 – 4 – 3 4xI – Combined control and protec-

8 and protection 7SJ612 – 6 – 11 4xI – tion devices. 7SJ61 and 7SJ62
device with local 7SJ621 – 8 – 7 4 x I, 3 x U – with 4 line text display, 7SJ63
bay control with graphic display. Optimized
7SJ622 – 7 – 11 4 x I, 3 x U – for 11/2-pole control
(SIPROTEC 4 7SJ631 4 – 5 1 4 x I, 3 x U –
design with large (max. 7 switching devices).
graphic display) 2) 7SJ632 5 + 43) 1 12 – 4 x I, 3 x U – 2-pole switching is also poss-
9 ible (max. 4 switching devices).
7SJ633 5 + 43) 1 10 – 4 x I, 3 x U 2
7SJ635 7 + 83) – 18 1 4 x I, 3 x U – also usable as ”single“
7SJ636 7 + 83) – 16 1 4 x I, 3 x U 2
10
1) Local (bay) control has to be provided separately if desired. In distribution-
type substations, mechanical local control of the switchgear may be sufficient.
2) Control of switching devices: 11/ -pole; 2-pole control possible
2
3) Second figure is number of heavy duty relays
Fig. 149: Standardized input/output devices with serial interfaces
The 6MB51 control master unit System monitoring primarily involves eval-
This unit lies at the heart of the 6MB sub- uating the self-monitoring results of the
station control system and, with its 32-bit devices and serial interfaces which are 1
80486 processor, satisfies the most de- coordinated by the control master unit.
manding requirements. In particular, in important EHV substations,
It is a compact unit inside the standard some users require redundancy of the con-
housing used in Siemens substation sec- trol master unit. In these cases, two con-
trol master units are connected to each
ondary equipment.
other via a serial interface. System moni-
2
The 6MB51 control master unit manages
the input/output devices, controls the inter- toring then consists of mutual error recog-
action between the control centers in the nition and, if necessary, automatic transfer
substation and the higher control levels, of control of the process to the redundant
processes information for the entire station control master unit.
and archives data in accordance with the 3
parameterized requirements of the user. The SINAUT LSA station control center
Specifically, the control master unit coordi-
nates communication The standard equipment of the station con-
trol center includes
■ to the higher network control levels
■ The PC with color monitor and LSAVIEW
■ to the substation control center
software package for displaying Fig. 150: Compact control master unit 6MB513 for a
4
■ to an analysis center located either in maximum of 32 serial interfaces to bay control units.
the station or connected remotely via – Station overview
Extended version 6MB514 for 64 serial interfaces to
a telephone line using a modem – Detailed pictures bay control units (double width) additionally available
■ to the input/output devices and/or the – Event and alarm lists
numerical protection units (bay control – Alarm information
units)
5
■ A printer for the output reports
■ to lower-level stations. The operator can access the required infor-
This is for the purpose of controlling and mation or initiate the desired operation
monitoring activities at the substation and quickly and safely with just a few keystrokes.
network control levels as well as providing
data for use by engineers. 6
Other tasks of the control master unit are
■ Event logging with a time resolution of
1 or 10 ms
■ Archiving of events, variations in meas-
ured values and fault records on mass-
7
storage units
■ Time synchronization using radio clock
(GPS, DCF77 or Rugby) or using a signal
from a higher-level control station
■ Automation tasks affecting more than 8
one bay:
– Parallel control of transformers
– Synchronizing
(measured value selection)
– Switching sequences 9
– Busbar voltage simulation
– Switchgear interlocking
■ Parameter management to meet the
relevant requirements specification
■ Self-monitoring and system monitoring. 10
Fig. 151: SINAUT LSA PC station control center with function keyboard
SINAUT LSA – Local Control Functions
Local control functions Control master unit Switchyard overview diagram

The process data acquired in the input/out- A switchyard single-line diagram can be
1 put unit are scanned cyclically by the con- configured to show an overview of the
Tasks of local control trol master unit. The control master unit substation. This diagram is used to give
The Siemens SINAUT LSA station control performs further information processing the operator a quick overview of the entire
system performs at first all tasks for con- of all data called from the feeders for sta- switchyard status and shows, for example,
ventional local control: tion tasks ”local control and telecontrol“ which feeders are connected or discon-
2 ■ Local control of and checkback indica-
with the associated event logging and fault nected. Current and other analog values
recording and therefore replaces the com- can also be displayed.
tions from the switching devices
plicated conventional marshalling distribu- Information about raised or cleared opera-
■ Acquisition, display and registration of tor racks. Marshalling is implemented un- tional and alarm indications is also dis-
analog values der microprocessor control in the control played along the top edge of the screen.
■ Acquisition, display and registration of master unit. It is not possible to perform control actions
3 alarms and fault indications in real time from the switchyard overview. If the opera-
■ Measurement data acquisition and pro- tor wants to switch a device, he has to
cessing Serial protection interface select a detailed diagram, say ”110 kV
■ Fault recording All protection indications and fault record- detailed diagram“. If the appropriate func-
■ Transformer open-loop and closed-loop ing data acquired for fault analysis in pro- tion key is pressed, the 110 kV detailed
tection relays are called by the control diagram (Fig. 153) appears. This display
4 control
master unit via the serial interface. shows the switching state of all switching
■ Synchronizing/paralleling
These include instantaneous values for devices of the feeders.
Unlike the previous conventional technolo- fault current and voltage of all phases and
gy with completely centralized processing ground, sampled with a resolution of 1 ms,
of these tasks and complicated parallel Function field control
as well as distance-to-fault location.
wiring and marshalling of process data, the
5 new microprocessor-controlled technology
In the menu of the function fields, it is pos-
sible, for example, to select between con-
benefits from the distribution of tasks to Serial data exchange trol switching devices and tap changing.
the central control master unit and the dis- The serial data exchange between the bay The control diagram shows details of sta-
tributed input/output units, and from the components and the control master unit tion components and allows control and
serial data exchange in telegrams between has important economic advantages. This defining of display properties or functions
6 these units. is especially true when one considers the (e.g. change in color/flashing). Further-
preparation and forwarding of the informa- more, the popup diagram window can be
Tasks of the input/output unit tion via serial data link to the control center opened from here, where switching opera-
communication module which is a compo- tions with control elements are performed.
The input/output unit performs the follow- nent of the control master unit. This mod- The configured switching operation works
ing bay-related tasks: ule is a single, system-compatible micro-
7 ■ Fast distributed acquisition of process processor module on which both the
as follows:
■ Selecting the switch: A click with the
data such as indications, analog values telecontrol tasks and telegram adaptation
to telegram structures of existing remote left mouse button on the switch symbol
and switching device positions and their
transmission systems are implemented. opens the popup window for command
preprocessing and buffering
This makes the station control independent output
■ Command output and monitoring
■ Output of the command. On clicking the
8 ■ Assignment of the time for each event of the telecontrol technology and the asso-
operate button in the popup window the
(time tag) ciated telegram structure used in the net-
work control center at a higher level of the command is output
■ Isolation from the switchyard via heavy-
hierarchy. The color of the switch symbol depends
duty relay contacts
on the state. If the command is found to
■ Run-time monitoring be safe after a check has been made for
9 ■ Limit value supervision Station control center
violations of interlock conditions, the
■ Paralleling/synchronizing The peripheral devices for operating and switching device in question is operated.
■ Local control and monitoring visualization (station control center) are In the case where a mouse is available,
Analog values can be input to the bay con- also connected to the control master unit. the appropriate device is selected by the
trol unit both via analog value transducers The following devices are part of the sta- usual mouse operation.
tion control center:
10 and by direct connection to CTs and VTs. Once the switching command has been
The required r.m.s. values for current and ■ A color VDU with a function keyboard executed and a checkback signal has been
voltage are digitized and calculated as well or mouse for display, control, event and received, the blinking symbol changes to
as active and reactive power. The advan- alarm indication, the new actual state on the VDU.
tage is that separate measuring cores and ■ A printer for on-line logging (event list), In this way, switching operations can be
analog value transducers for operational ■ Mass storage. performed very simply and absolutely with-
measurement are eliminated. out error. If commands violate the interlock
conditions or if the switch position is not
adopted by a switching device, for exam-
ple, because of a drive fault, the relevant
fault indications or notes are displayed on
the screen.
Event list
All events are logged in chronological or-
der. The event list can be displayed on the 1
VDU whenever called or printed out on
a printer or stored on a mass-storage me-
dium. Fig. 153 shows a section of this
event list as it appears on the VDU.
The event list can also be incorporated in 2
the detailed displays. The bay-related
events can therefore also be shown in the
detailed displays.
Example event list (Fig. 154) 3

The date can be seen in the left-hand area
and the events are shown in order of prior-
ity. Switching commands and fault indi-
cations are displayed with a precision of up
to 1 ms and events with high priority and
protection indications after a fault-detec- Fig. 152a: Compact I/O unit with local (bay) control, extended version 6MB5240-3
4
tion are shown with millisecond resolution.
A command that is accepted by the control This system with representation in the tion leads the user to the display of meas-
system is also displayed. This can be seen alarm list therefore supersedes danger urands, metering values, alarm lists and
by the index ”+“ of the command (OP), alarm equipment with two-frequency blink- status messages. The keypad design with
otherwise ”OP–“ would appear. ing lamps traditionally used with conven- 6 colors supports the operator for quick 5
If the switchgear device itself does not tional equipment. and secure operation. User authorization is
execute the command, ”FB–“ (checkback As stated above, all events can also be handled via password, for example un-
negative) indicates this. ”FB+“ results continuously logged in chronological order locked switching.
after successful command execution. The on the associated printer, too. The appear- The new SIPROTEC4 devices also allow
texts chosen are suggestions and can be ance of this event list is identical to that on local bay control. At the 7SJ63 and 6MD63
parameterized differently. the VDU. The alarm list can also be incor- devices, a large graphic display and an er- 6
The event list shows that a protection porated in the detailed displays. The bay- gonomic keypad assist the operator in con-
fault-detection (general start GS) has oc- related alarms can therefore also be trol of the switching devices and read out
curred with all the associated details. The shown in the detailed displays. messages, measurements and metering
real time is shown in the left-hand column values. In the 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 protection
and the relative time with millisecond pre- units, the user interface consists of a 4-line
cision in the right-hand column, permitting
Mass storage
text display. These smaller units also make
7
clear and fast fault analysis. The fault loca- It is also possible to store historic fault it possible to control the feeder circuit-
tion, 17 km in this case, is also displayed. data, i.e. fault recording data and events on breaker.
The lower section of the event list shows mass-storage medium. All SIPROTEC4 devices are parameterized
examples of raised (RAI) and cleared (CLE) It can accept data from the control master with the operating program DIGSI4.
alarm indications, such as ”voltage trans- units and stores it on Flash EPROMs. This 8
former miniature-circuit-breaker tripped“. static memory is completely maintenance-
This fault has been remedied as can be free when compared to floppy or hard disc
seen from the corresponding cleared indi- systems. 8Mbyte of recorded data can be
cation. The letter S in the top line, called stored. The locally or remotely readable
the indication bar, indicates that a fault indi- memory permits evaluation of the data us-
cation has been received that is stored in ing a PC. This personal computer can be 9
a separate ”warning list“. set up separately from the control equip-
ment, e.g. in an office. Communication
then takes place via a telephone-modem
Example alarm list (Fig. 155) connection.
When the alarm list is selected, it is dis- In addition to fault recording data, opera-
played on the VDU. In this danger alarm tional data, such as load-monitoring values 10
concept a distinction is made between (current, voltage, power, etc.) and events
cleared and raised and between acknowl- can be stored.
edged and unacknowledged indications.
Raised indications are shown in red, Local bay control (Fig.152a, Fig. 152b)
cleared indications are green (similar to
the fast/slow blinking lamp principle). With the 6MB524 bay control units, local
The letter Q is placed in front of an indica- control and monitoring directly in the bay is
tion that has not yet been acknowledged. possible. The large graphic display can
Indications that are raised and cleared and show customer-specific single-line dia-
acknowledged are displayed in white in grams. A convenient menu-guided opera- Fig. 152b: 6MD63 bay control unit
the list.
4
Fig. 153: SINAUT LSA substation control, example: overview picture Fig. 154: SINAUT LSA substation control, example: event list
Fig. 155: SINAUT LSA substation control, example: alarm list Fig. 156: 6MB substation control system, example: fault recording
9
Example fault recording (Fig. 156) 12 ms after the general start, the circuit The important point is that this fault re-
breaker was tripped (OFF) and after further cording is possible in all feeders that are
After a fault, the millisecond-precision val- 80 ms, the fault was cleared. equipped with the microprocessor-control-
ues for the phase currents and voltages After approx. 120 ms the protection reset. led protection having a serial interface
10 and the ground current and ground voltage Voltage recovery after disconnection was according to IEC 60870-5-103.
are buffered in the feeder protection. recorded up to 600 ms after the general
These values are called from the numerical start.
feeder protection by the control master
unit and can be output as curves with the This format permits quick and clear analy-
program LSAPROCESS (Fig. 156). sis of a fault. The correct operation of the
The time marking 0 indicates the time of protection and the circuit breaker can be
fault detection, i.e. the relay general start seen in the fault recording (Fig. 156).
(GS). Approx. 5 ms before the general The high-voltage feeder protection present-
start, a three-phase fault to ground oc- ly includes a time range of at least 5 sec-
curred, which can be seen by the rise in onds for the fault recording.
phase currents and the ground current.
SINAUT LSA – Application Examples
Application examples
1
The flexible use of the components of the
Coordinated Protection and Substation
Control System SINAUT LSA is demon- Bay 1 2 n Bus coupler
strated in the following for some typical
application examples.
2
Application in high-voltage substations
with relay kiosks
Fig. 157 shows the arrangement of the
local components. Each two bays (line or 3
transformer) are assigned to one kiosk.
Each bay has at least one input/output unit
for control (bay control unit) and one pro-
tection unit. In extra-high voltage, the pro-
tection is normally doubled (main and back-
up protection). 4
Local control is performed at the bay units
(6MB524) using the integrated graphic dis- FPR FPR FPR FPR
play and keypad. BCU BCU BCU BCU
Switchgear interlocking is included in the
Relay
bay control units and in the central control
kiosks 5
unit.
The protection relays are serially connect-
ed to the bay control unit by optical-fiber
links. To the network
Control control center
building
6
CCU with
CCC and MS Modem
To the operations
and maintenance
office
Parallel 7
VDU
Serial
8
Key:
CCU Central control unit VDU Visual display unit
CCC Control center coupling FPR Feeder protection relays
MS Mass storage BCU Bay control unit 9
Fig. 157: Application example of outdoor HV or EHV substations with relay kiosks
10
In extremely important substations, mainly

extra-high voltage, there exists a doubling
1 philosophy. In these substations, the feed-
er protection, the DC supply, the operating
coils and the telecontrol interface are dou- Network control center
bled. In such cases, the station control sys-
tem with its serial connections, and the Printer Printer
master unit with the control center cou-
2 pling can also be doubled.
Control/
annunciation
Control/
annunciation
Both master units are brought up-to-date
in signal direction. The operation manage-
ment can be switched over between the
two master units (Fig. 158).
3
4 Control system Control Control Control system

master unit 1 center center master unit 2
with mass coupling Switchover and coupling with mass
storage 1 monitoring* storage 2
5 Local
control •••••••••••• ••••••••••••
level
Bay
control level
6
••••••••••
Protec- Bay Bay Protec-

tion relay Control •••••••••••• Control tion relay
unit unit
7
8
Feeder 1 Switchgear Feeder n
9 Parallel Serial
*only principle shown
Fig. 158: System concept with double central control
10
Application in indoor high-voltage

substations Control room Switchgear room
The following example (Fig. 159) shows an
1
indoor high-voltage substation. All decen- VDU
tralized control system components, such Switchgear Bus
bay 1 bay 2 … coupler
as bay control unit and feeder protection
are also grouped per bay and installed To the office Modem
close to the switchgear. They are connect- 2
ed to the central control unit in the same
way as described in the outdoor version
via fiber-optic cables.
BCU BCU Control BCU

Application in medium-voltage
and FPR
3
substations pro-
FPR FPR
The same basic arrangement is also appli- tection BCU
cable to medium-voltage (distribution-type) BCU BCU cubicles CCU
substations (Fig. 160 and 161). To the net-
The feeder protection and the compact in- work control
put/output units are, however, preferably center 4
installed in the low-voltage compartment Parallel Serial
of the feeders (Fig. 160) to save costs.
There is now a trend to apply combined
control and protection units. The relay
Key:
7SJ63, for example, provides protection 5
and measurement, and has integrated CCU Central control unit with control FPR Feeder protection relays
graphic display and keypad for bay control. center coupling and mass storage BCU Bay control unit
Thus, only one device is needed per cable, VDU Monitor
motor or O H line feeder.
Fig. 159: Typical example of indoor substations with switchgear interlocking system 6
Protection and substation control SINAUT LSA with input/output units and numerical
protection installed in low-voltage compartments of the switchgear
7
VDU with keyboard Printer Network control Operation place
center
1 2 3 4 5 1 Feeder protection unit

(e.g. 7UT51 transformer protection) 9
2 Feeder I/O contol unit (e.g. 6MB524)
3 Combined control and
protection feeder unit 7SJ53
Central control
unit with optical- 4 Miniature I/O unit 6MB525 10
fiber link 5 Feeder protection
(e.g. 7SD5 line differential protection)
Fig. 160: Protection and substation control system SINAUT LSA for a distribution-type substation
Fig. 162 shows an example for the most

simple wiring of the feeder units. Control room Switchgear room
1 The voltages between the bay control unit
and the protection can be paralleled at the
bay control unit because the plug-in mod- VDU Bus
Switchgear coupler
ules have a double connection facility.
The current is connected in series be- To the office Modem
tween the devices. The current input at
2 the bay control unit is dimensioned for
100xIN, 1 s (protection dimensioning). BCUFPR BCU FPR CCU BCUFPR
The plug-in modules have a short-circuiting
facility to avoid opening of CT circuits.
The accuracy of the operational measure-
3 ments depends on the protection charac-
teristics. Normally, it is approx. 2% of IN.
If more exact values are required, a sepa-
rate measuring core must be provided.
The serial interface of the protection is
connected to the bay control unit.
4 The protection data is transferred to the
control central unit via the connection be- Parallel To the network control center
Serial
tween the bay control unit and the central
unit. Thus, only one serial connection to the
central unit is required per feeder.
5 Key:
CCU Central control unit FPR Feeder protection For o/c feeder or
with mass storage and relay motor protection also
control center coupling available as one com-
BCU Bay Control Unit bined unit (e.g. 7SJ63)
VDU Monitor
6
Fig. 161: Application example of medium-voltage switchgear
7 Bay Control Unit 1) Numerical 1)

Plug-in module 6MB52 Protection
Switching status
8
close close
CB ON/OFF 2) or 2) or 2)
open trip
9 Protection Short-circuiting
core I facility
10
U
1) For o/c feeder protection or motor protection Serial data connection

also available as combined control
and protection unit 7SJ63
2) Only one circuit shown
Fig. 162: Principle wiring diagram of the medium-voltage feeder components
System configuration They can also be used for load monitor-

ing and indication (accuracy about 2% of Incoming transformer bays
The system arrangement depends on the
type of substation, the number of feeders
rated value). In this way, the number of 1
analog inputs of the bay control units
and the required control and protection
can be reduced. This is often practised OF To the central
functions. The basic equipment can be
in distribution-type substations. control unit
chosen according to the following criteria: OF
The device selection is discussed in the
Central control master unit following example. OF
2
has to be chosen according to the
Example:
number of bay control units to be serially
Substation control configuration
connected:
■ 6MB513 for a maximum of 32 serial Fig. 163 shows the arrangement of a
interfaces typical distribution-type substation with
■ 6MB514 for a maximum of 64 serial
two incoming transformers, 10 outgoing 3
feeders and a bus tie. 6MB5240-2 7SJ61 7UT512
interfaces
At the most 9 more serial interfaces are The required inputs and outputs at bay HV
available for connection of data channels to level are listed in Fig. 164 for the incoming
load dispatch centers, local substation con- transformer feeders and in Fig. 165 for the M
trol PCs, printers, etc. outgoing line feeders, the bus tie and the 4
VT bay. M
I
Substation control center Each bay control unit is connected to the
central control unit via fiber-optic cables 50/
It normally consists of a PC with keyboard 51
and a mouse, color monitor, LSAVIEW soft- (graded index fibers). V
ware and a printer for the output of reports. The o/c relays 7SJ60, the minicompact 87T
For exact time synchronization of 1 milli- I/O units 6MB5250 and the measuring
RTD's 63 5
second accuracy, a GPS or DCF77 receiver transducers 7KG60 each have RS 485
with antenna may be used. communication interfaces and are connect-
ed to a bus of a twisted pair of wires. M
Bay control units An RS485 converter to fiber-optic is there- M MV
Normally, a separate bay control unit is as- fore additionally provided to adapt the seri-
signed to every substation bay. The type al wire link to the fiber-optic inputs of the
6
has to be selected according to the follow- central unit. Data acqusition
ing requirements: Recommendations for the selection of
■ Number of command outputs: the protection relays are given in the sec- 1 x DSI Isolator HV side
that means the sum of circuit breakers, tion System Protection (6/8 and following
1 x DSI Circuit-breaker HV side
isolators and other equipment to be cen- pages). 7
The selection of the combined control/pro- 1 x DSI Isolator MV side
trally or remotely controlled. The stated
double commands are normally provided tection units 7SJ531 or 7SJ63 is recom- 1 x DSI Circuit-breaker MV side
for double-pole (”+“ and ”–“) control of mended when local control at bay level is
8 x DSI Transformer
trip or closing coils. to be provided by the bay control unit. The
tap-changer positions
low-cost solution 7SJ60 + 6MB5250
Each double-pole command can be sep-
should be selected where switchgear inte- 1 x SSI Alarm Buchholz 1 8
arated into two single-pole commands
where stated (Fig. 149, page 6/80). grated mechanical local control is acceptable. 1 x SSI Alarm Buchholz 2
■ Number of digital signal inputs: 3 x V, 3 x J, 8 xϑ Measuring values
as the sum of alarms, breaker and iso- Typical distribution-type substation
lator positions, tap changer positions, Control
binary coded meter values, etc, to be 9
acquired, processed or monitored. 2 x DCO Isolator HV side
Position monitoring requires double 2 x DCO Circuit-breaker HV side
signal inputs while single inputs are 2 x DCO Isolator MV side
sufficient for normal alarms. 115 kV 115 kV
2 x DCO Circuit-breaker MV side
■ Number of analog inputs:
2 x SCO Tap changer, higher, lower
10
depends on the number of voltages, 13.8 kV 13.8 kV
currents and other analog values 1 x SCO Emergency trip
(e.g. temperatures) to be monitored.
Currents (rated 1 A or 5 A ) or voltages SSI Single signal input
(normally rated 100 to 110 V) can be DSI Double signal input
directly connected to the bay control
DCO Double command
units. No transducers are required.
Numerical protection relays also acquire SCO Single command
and process currents and voltages. 5 feeders 5 feeders
Fig. 163: Typical distribution-type substation Fig. 164: Typical I/O signal requirements for a trans-
former bay
1
To load dispatch
center
Central
control
2 unit
To transformer 6MB513
GPS
feeders
OF VDU Printer Mass
(option) storage
OF
3
OF
4 RS485/O F
RS485
5
6 7KG60 6MB 7SJ60 6MB 7SJ60 6MB 7SJ60 7SJ531 7SJ531

5250 5250 5250 or 7SJ63 or 7SJ63
7 51
M M M M
51 51 51 51
9 Voltage transformer-bay Per feeder Bus tie Per feeder
1 x DSI Isolator 1 x DSI Isolator

1 x DSI Grounding switch 1 x DSI Grounding switch
1 x DSI Circuit-breaker 1 x DSI Circuit-breaker 1 x DSI Circuit-breaker
10
5 x SSI 5 alarms 9 x SSI 9 alarms 5 x SSI 5 alarms
Load currents are taken from the protection relays Measuring values
1 x 7KG60 (3 x V, 3 x I) from protection
Control
2 x DCO Circuit-breaker 2 x DCO Circuit-breaker 2 x DCO Circuit-breaker
Fig. 165: Typical I/O signal requirements for feeders of a distribution-type substation
SINAUT LSA – Centralized (RTU) Structure
Enhanced remote
terminal units 6MB551 System Station control center (option) Central evaluation 1
control center station (PC)
The 6MB55 telecontrol system is based on
the same hardware and software modules
Remote control Telephone channel
as the 6MB51 substation control system. channel
The functions of the inupt/output devices 2
have been taken away from the bays and Radio time
relocated to the central unit at station con- (option)
trol level. The result is the 6MB551 en-
hanced remote terminal unit (ERTU). Enhanced terminal unit 6MB551
Special plug-in modules for control and
acquisition of process signals are used 3
instead of the bay dedicated input/output 1 … … n
devices: Marshalling rack
■ Digital input (32 DI) Station protection
Transducers and 7SS5
■ Analog input (32 AI grouped, interposing relays
16 AI isolated) 4
■ Command output (32 CO) and
(option) (option)
■ Command enabling
These modules communicate with the
central modules in the same frame via the
internal standard LSA bus. The bus can be 5
extended to further frames by parallel in- Protection relay Bay Control Unit
terfaces. 7S/7U 6MB52*
The 6MB551 station control unit therefore
has the basic structure of a remote termi-
nal unit but offers all the functions of the
6MB51 substation control system such as:
6
Substation Extension to substation
Communication
■ to the higher network control levels Serial interface Parallel interface
■ to an analysis center located either in
the station or connected remotely via Fig. 166: Protection and substation control system LSA 678 for a distribution-type substation 7
a telephone line using a modem
■ to the bay control unit and/or the numer-
ical protection units (bay control units)
■ to lower-level stations (node function).
This is for the purpose of controlling and 8
monitoring activities at the substation and
network control levels as well as providing
data for system planning and analysis.
10
SINAUT LSA – Centralized (RTU) Structure
Other tasks of the enhanced RTU are These distributed input/output devices
■ Event logging with a time resolution of can then be connected via serial interface
1 1 or 10 ms to the telecontrol equipment. Additional
■ Archiving of events, variations in meas- parameterization takes care of their actual
ured values and fault records on mass integration in the operational hierarchy.
storage units The 6MB551 RTU system is also available
■ Time synchronization using radio clock as standard cubicle version SINAUT LSA
2 (GPS, DCF77 or Rugby) or using a signal COMPACT 6MB5540. The modules and
from a higher-level control station the bus system have been kept; the rack
■ Automation tasks affecting more than design and the connection technology,
one bay: however, have been cost-optimized (fixed
rack only and plug connectors).
– Parallel control of transformers
This version is limited to a baseframe
3 – Synchronizing plus one extension frame with altogether
(measured value selection) 33 I/O modules, and a maximum of 5 seri-
– Switching sequences al interfaces for telecontrol connection
– Busbar voltage simulation without communication to bay control
– Switchgear interlocking units or numerical protection units.
4 ■ Parameter management to meet the
relevant requirements specification
■ Self-monitoring and system monitoring.
■ Up to 96 serial fiber-optic interfaces to
distributed bay control units
■ Up to 5 expansion frames.
5 Configuration including signal I/O modules
can be parameterized as desired.
Up to 121 signal I/O modules can be used
Fig. 167: 6MB551 enhanced remote terminal unit, in-
stalled in an 8MC standard cubicle with baseframe (21 per frame minus one in the baseframe
and expansion frame for each expansion frame, i.e. totally
6 6 x 21 – 5 = 121).
The 6MB551 station control unit can
therefore be expanded from having simple
telecontrol data processing functions to
assuming the complex functionality of a
7 substation control system.
The same applies to the process signal
capacity. In one unit, more than 4 000 data
points can be addressed and, by means of
serial interfacing of subsystems, this figure
can be increased even further.
8 The 6MB551 station control unit simplifies
the incorporation of extensions to the sub-
station by using the decentralized 6MB52*
bay control units for the additional substa-
tion bays.
9
10
SINAUT LSA – Remote Terminal Units
Remote terminal units (RTUs)

1
The following range of intelligent RTUs are
designed for high-performance data acqui-
sition, data processing and remote control
of substations. The compact versions
6MB552/553 of SINAUT LSA are intended
for use in smaller substations. 2
Fig. 170: 6MB5530-0 minicompact RTU for small

process signal capacity
Fig. 168: 6MB552 compact RTU for medium process Fig. 169: SINAUT LSA COMPACT 6MB5540 remote Fig. 171: 6MB5530-1 remote terminal unit (RTC) with
signal capacity terminal unit installed in a cubicle cable-shield communication 7
Design Type Single Alarm Analog Serial ports Serial ports
commands inputs inputs to control to bay units
centers
8
Minicompact 6MB5530-0A 8 8 – 1 –
RTU* 6MB5530-0B 8 24 8
6MB5530-0C 8 32 –
Remote ter- 6MB5530-1A 8 8 – 1 – 9

minal unit with 6MB5530-1C 8 32 – additional
cable shield gateway
communication
(RTC)
Compact RTU 6MB552-0A 321)/8 72 32 1 7

10
6MB552-0B 321)/8 40 162) Option 2
6MB552-0C 321)/8 104 –
6MB552-0D 8 136 –
* Further 3 minicompact RTUs can be serially connected in cascade

for extension (maximum distance 100 m)
1) With switching-current check
2) Potential-free
Fig. 172: Remote terminal units, process signal volumes
1 Control Control
center center
1… …n
2
Modem Modem
Telecontrol channel
3
Substation
level
Modem
Point to point con. 1)
4 RTU M M
Line connection 1) Optical fiber
M
M M …… M 1)
M
1)
RTU RTU RTU M
5
2) 2) 2)
RTU Marshalling rack
Bay level Protection
M relays and
Interposing relays, transducers I/O units
RTU M Loop configuration
6
M Existing switchgear Extended switchgear
1) Telecontrol channel
RTU 2) Only with compact RTU 6MB552
M = Modem
7 Fig. 173: RTU interfaces
RTU interfaces
The described RTUs are connected to the
switchgear via interposing relays and meas-
8 uring transducers (± 2.5 to ± 20 mA DC)
(Fig. 173). Serial connection of numerical
protection relays and control I/O units is
possible with the compact RTU type
6MB552.
9 The communication protocols for the serial
connection to system control centers can
be IEC standard 870-5-101 or the Siemens
proprietary protocols 8FW.
For the communication with protection
relays, the IEC standard 870-5-103 is im-
10 plemented.
Besides these standard protocols, more
than 100 legacy protocols including deriva-
tives are implemented for remote control
links up to system control centers and
down to remote substations (see table
overleaf).
Fig. 174: VF coupler with ferrite core 35 mm
List of implemented legacy protocols: ■ IEC 870-5-BAG Cable-shield communication

■ ADLP 180 ■ IEC 870-5-VEAG The minicompact RTU can be delivered
■ ANSI X3.28 ■ Indactic 21 in a special version for communication via
1
■ CETT 20 ■ Indactic 23 cable shield (Type 6MB5530-1).
■ CETT 50 ■ Indactic 33 It does not need a separate signaling link.
■ DNP3.0 ■ Indactic ZM20 The coded voice frequency (9.4 and
■ DUST 3964R
9.9 kHz) is coupled to the cable shield with
■ LMU
(SINAUT 8-FW-data structure) ■ Modbus
a special ferrite core (35 mm or 100 mm 2
window diameter) as shown in Fig. 174.
■ EFD 300 ■ Netcon 8830 The special modem for cable-shield com-
■ EFD 400 ■ RP570 munication is integrated in the RTU.
■ F4F ■ SAT 1703 Fig. 175 shows as an example the struc-
■ FW 535 ■ SEAB 1F ture of a remote control network for
■ FW 537 ■ SINAUT 8-FW monitoring and control of a local supply 3
■ Geadat 90 network.
■ SINAUT HSL
■ Geadat 81GT ■ SINAUT ST1
■ GI74 ■ Telegyr 709E
■ Granit ■ Telegyr 809
■ Harris 5000
4
■ Tracec 130
■ IDS ■ Ursatron 8000
■ IEC 60870-5-101 ■ Wisp+
5
Higher telecontrol level
Power cable (typically 5 km)
…
6
Modem VF couplers VF couplers VF couplers VF couplers
(optional)
Signal Modem Modem
loop Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2
Branch 1
Mini RTU Mini RTU
6MB5530-1 (RTC) 6MB5530-1 (RTC) 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
8
Multiplexer Distribution station Distribution station
(optional) … Branch 2 1st station of branch 1 16th station of branch 1
Modem …
Channel 1 Channel 2 Power cable (typically 5 km)
Communication … 9
control unit
6MB5530-1 (CCU) VF couplers VF couplers VF couplers
Signal Modem Modem
loop Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 1 Channel 2
VF couplers
Mini RTU Mini RTU 10
6MB5530-1 (RTC) 6MB5530-1 (RTC)
Substation Substation
1st station of branch 8 16th station of branch 8
Fig. 175: Remote control network based on remote terminal units with cable-shield communication
SICAM – Overview
SICAM is an equipment family consisting

of products for digital power automation. SICAM RTU
1 The system is continuous, from the sys-
tem control center, through the information
IEC 60 870-5-101
technology, to the bay protection and con- SINAUT 8-FW
trol units. PROFIBUS
The SICAM System is based on SIMATIC*) Industrial Ethernet
2 and PC standard modules. SICAM is thus
an open system with standardized inter-
faces, readily lending itself to further de- PROFIBUS
velopment.
3
The SICAM family consists of the follow-
ing individual systems (see Fig. 176): Marshalling rack ... ...
■ SICAM RTU, the telecontrol system with
the following features Interposing relays, transducers SIMEAS IEDs
Q or T Trans- (Relays, etc.)
– Principal function: information transfer ducers
– Central process connection Switchgear
– PLC functions
4 – Communication with control center SICAM SAS
■ SICAM SAS, the decentralized automa-
tion system System Control center
– Principal function: substation automa- SICAM IEC 60 870-5-101
tion WinCC
5 – Decentralized and centralized process
connection
– Local operation and monitoring with
archiving functions
– Communication with the control
6 center
PROFIBUS
■ SICAM PCC, the PC-based Station Con- IEC 60870-5-103

trol System with the following features
– Principal function:
Substation supervision and control
7 – Decentralized process connection IEC 60 870-5-103
– LAN/WAN communication with SIPROTEC 4 Process Other SIPROTEC 3
IEC 60870-6 TASE.2 Protection and control unit IEDs Protection relays
control devices
– Flexible communication
– Linkage to Office® products SICAM PCC
8
Other WAN Corporate infor-
networks e.g. ICCP mation system
9 System
Control center
10 PROFIBUS
IEC 60870-5-103
SIPROTEC 4
Protection and Other IEDs Protection relays
control devices
*) Siemens PLCs and Industrial Automation
Systems (see Catalog ST70) Fig. 176: The SICAM family
SICAM RTU – Design
SICAM: Open system structure

1
SICAM
2
Database Data Software Communi- Communication
recording cation
SICAM WinCC SCADA 3
DIGSI CPU
4
SICAM plusTOOLS Central I/O

5
Bay control devices SIPROTEC Protective devices
Fig.177: SICAM system structure
7
System control center
SICAM RTU 6MD201 ■ CT and VT graded measuring value ac-
quisition via serially connected numerical
Enhanced Remote Terminal Unit transducers SIMEAS Q or T
(see page 6/132) 8
Overview ■ Acquisition of short-time event signals
with 1 ms resolution and real-time
The SICAM RTU Remote Terminal Unit is stamping
based on the SIMATIC S7-400, a powerful ■ Preprocessing of information acquired
PLC version of the Siemens product range
for industrial automation. The SIMATIC S7-
(e.g. double indications, metered values)
Communication
9
■ Fail-safe process control (e.g., 1-out-of-n
400 has been supplemented by the addi-
tion of modules and functions so as to pro- check, switching current check)
vide a flexible, efficient remote terminal ■ Secure long-distance data transmission SICAM
unit. Based on worldwide used SIMATIC using the IEC 60870-5-101 or SINAUT RTU
8-FW protocol
S7-400, it is possible to add project-specif- 10
ic automation functions to the existing tel- ■ Remote diagnostic capability
econtrol functions. The open and uniform system structure is
The SIMATIC S7-400 System has been ex- illustrated in Fig. 177, showing the essen-
panded to include the following properties: tial modules.
■ All-round isolation of all connections with A variety of SICAM equipment family prod-
2.5 kV electric strength ucts are available depending on the differ-
■ Heavy duty output contacts (10 A, ent requirements and applications.
Central process
150 VDC, 240 AC) on external relay mo- The individual system modules are de- connection
dule (type LR with up to 16 command scribed in detail in the sections below.
relays) Fig. 178: SICAM RTU remote terminal unit
System architecture
The SICAM RTU is a modular system. It is
1 suitable for substation sizes from approxi-
mately 300 up to 2048 data points.
The SICAM RTU consists of the:
■ SICAM S7-400 basic rack with its exten-
sion facilities and
2 ■ Any S7-400 CPU (412 to 477, with/with-
out PROFIBUS connection). As standard
CPU, the CPU 412 or CPU 413 is used.
To supplement the SIMATIC S7-400 mod-
ules, telecontrol-specific modules have
3 been developed in order to fulfill the re-
quired properties and functions, such as
for example electric insulation strength and
time resolution.
These are the following modules:
4 ■ Power supply
– Voltage range from 19 V–72 V DC
Fig. 179: SICAM mounting rack
– 88 V–288 V AC/DC
■ Process input and output modules
– Digital input DI (32 inputs) for status
5 indications, counting pulses, bit pat-
terns and transformer tap settings
• voltage ranges:
24–60 V DC
110–125 V DC
– Analog input AI (32 analog inputs
6 grouped, 16 AIR (analog inputs iso-
lated) for currents (0.5 mA–24 mA)
and voltages (0.5 V–10 V)
– Command output (32 CO) for
commands and digital setpoints
7 • voltage range: 24 –125 V DC
– Command release (8 DI, 8 DO) for
local inputs and outputs and monitor-
ing of command output circuits
• voltage ranges:
24–60 V DC
8 110–125 V DC
■ Communication module
– Telecontrol processor TP1 for commu-
nication with the system control cen-
ter with protocols IEC 60870-5-101
9 and SINAUT 8-FW and as time signal
receivers for DCF77 or GPS reception.
The Power Supply and the I/O modules
can also be used in SICAM SAS.
10
Construction
The SICAM RTU is based on the SIMATIC
S7-400. The construction of the SICAM 1
RTU is therefore, as is the case with
SIMATIC, highly compact, straightforward
and simple to operate:
■ All connections are accessible from the
front. Therefore, no swivel frame is nec- 2
essary.
■ The modules are enclosed and therefore
extremely rugged.
■ Plugging and unplugging of modules is
possible while in operation; therefore 3
maintenance work can be carried out in
a minimum of time (reduced MTTR).
■ Direct process connection is effected by
means of self-coding front plug connec-
tors of screw-in or crimp design.
■ During configuration, no module slot 4
rules have to be observed; the SICAM
RTU permits free module fitting.
■ No forms of setting are necessary on
the modules; replacement can be carried
out in a minimum of time. 5
Dependent on configuration level and cus-
tomer requirements, there are two housing Fig. 180a: SICAM RTU wall-mounting cabinet
variants:
■ a floor-mounting cabinet and
■ a wall-mounting cabinet. 6
Both housing variants are optimized for the
SICAM RTU; they are of flexible modular
construction. Thus, for example, provision
is made for installation of accessories to
provide a cost-effective rack system. 7
10
Fig. 180b: SICAM RTU floor-mounting cabinet
SICAM Modules
SICAM RTU modules have been developed
1 to be SIMATIC-compatible and can there-
fore be used in a standard SIMATIC S7-400,
for example for the following applications:
■ Acquisition of status indications with a
resolution of 1 ms and an accuracy of
2 ± 2 ms
■ Time synchronization of the SIMATIC
CPU to within an accuracy of ± 2 ms
■ An analog input module with 32 channels
with current or voltage inputs
3 ■ Use of modules with 2.5 kV electric insu-
lation strength in order to save interpos-
ing relays
The modules are used for example in hydro-
power plants for acquisition of fault events
via digital input with a resolution of 1 ms
4 and relaying them to a power station sys-
tem, for example via an Industrial Ethernet.
The other application is the use of the com-
munication module TP1 in a SIMATIC NET -
IEC 60870-5-101 gateway. Fig. 182 shows
5 an example of a PROFIBUS gateway.
Fig. 181: SICAM module

7
SICAM RTU
8 IEC 60870-5-101
SINAUT 8-FW
PROFIBUS
Industrial Ethernet
9 Gateway
Profibus
10
IEDs
Switchgear
Fig. 182: Gateway: PROFIBUS – IEC 60870-5-101
SICAM RTU – Functions
SICAM RTU functions

SICAM RTU possesses telecontrol func-
tions, such as: 1
■ Alarm acquisition and processing, includ-
ing:
– Single point information
– Double point information
– Bit patterns
2
– Transformer taps
– Metering pulses
■ Measured value acquisition and process-
ing, including:
– parameterizable current inputs in
3
ranges from
0.5 mA–24 mA
– parameterizable voltage inputs in
ranges from 0.5 V – 10 V
1. Select a module from the Hardware Catalog and
■ Fail-safe command output, including: 2. Drag it to the desired module location – 4
automatic plausibility checking and addressing
– Single commands
– Double commands
– Bit pattern outputs
– Transformer tap change control Fig. 183: plusTOOLS for SICAM RTU, hardware configuration
– Pulse commands 5
– Continuous commands ■ Time synchronization via DCF or GPS re- Engineering
■ Telecontrol communication with a maxi- ceiver on the TP1 module. The SICAM RTU is designed such that all
mum of two system control centers The SIMATIC CPU is synchronized to telecontrol functions are parameterizable.
with different telecontrol messages, within an accuracy of 1 ms. Comprehensive Help texts assist the oper-
with the standardized IEC 60870-5-101 ■ Serial interface to a maximum of two ator during configuration. The following 6
and/or with the worldwide proven control centers. configuration steps are carried out with the
SINAUT 8-FW protocol. In addition to selection of the telecontrol aid of the intuitive-operation program plus-
In addition to the standard RTU functions, protocols IEC 60870-5-101 and SINAUT TOOLS for SICAM RTU:
the SICAM RTU provides additional func- 8-FW, the scope of status indications, ■ Creation of hardware configuration,
tions, such as: measured values and commands per
control center per interface can be con-
SIMATIC modules and SICAM modules 7
■ Efficient operation mode control with 15 ■ Setting of module parameters on the
priorities and various send lists, figured, with separate telecontrol proto-
cols, different process data, different SIMATIC modules and SICAM modules
such as: ■ Assignment of process data to the mes-
message addresses and different modes.
– Spontaneous lists with/without time sage addresses
■ Can be extended up to 4096 information
– Scan lists for measured values, me-
tered values or status indications
points ■ Assignment of message addresses to 8
■ Comprehensive remote diagnostic facili- the message lists in the mode control
– Cyclic lists system, stipulation of send priorities.
ties locally or in remote form with the aid
– Time-controlled lists of the SIMATIC TeleService. ■ Checking of all parameters for plausibil-
With the aid of this mode control system, ■ Output of analog setpoints via the ity.
it is possible to optimize the data flow be- S7-400 AO module (1500 kV insulated) ■ Loading of parameters into a non-volatile
tween remote terminal unit and system flash EPROM of the CPU. 9
■ SICAM RTU is maintenance-free and
control center. requires no fan cooling Fig. 183 shows as an example the mask
■ The variety of available module types for hardware configuration.
with wide-range inputs is kept to a mini-
mum; the value ranges are parameterizble.
10
SICAM RTU – Functions
Automation functions
The SICAM RTU is based on the SIMATIC
1 S7-400. Therefore, all modules of the
SIMATIC S7-400 System can be used in a
SICAM RTU: For example, a CPU 413-DP
with PROFIBUS connection or the com-
munication processor CP 441, e.g. for con-
2 nection of a Modbus device.
If additional functions are to be introduced
project-specifically by S7 PLC means,
these can be integrated with the aid of the
internal API Interface (Application Program
Interface). Thus, for example, the data re-
3 ceived via the CP 441 can be processed
internally and sent via the TP1 to the sys-
tem control center.
The following functions can for example
be implemented:
4 ■ Initiate functions by commands from
the system control center
■ Derive commands as a function of
measured value changes (e.g. load
shedding when a frequency drop has
Fig. 184a: Operator Panel
5 been measured)
■ Connection of an operator panel to the
serial system interface (Fig. 184a/b)
■ Connection of decentralized peripherals
via the PROFIBUS DP
6
10
Fig. 184b: Operator Panel mounted in a cubicle door
SICAM MRTU/microRTU
SICAM MRTU 6MD202/6MD203

Small Remote Terminal Unit 1
Overview
Supplementary to the SICAM RTU, the
following small remote terminal units are
available for low-level upgrades: 2
■ SICAM microRTU 6MD203 up to
50 process inputs/outputs
■ SICAM miniRTU 6MD202 up to
300 process inputs/outputs
The two remote terminal units are based 3
on the SIMATIC S7-200.
Supplementary to the SIMATIC modules, a
“SICAM TCM” communication module has
been developed for the SICAM miniRTU.
The TCM module is installed in a S7-214 Fig. 185: SICAM microRTU 4
housing.
The SICAM micro and miniRTUs provide
small remote terminal units which handle SICAM microRTU 6MD203
the process data and communicate by
means of an assured IEC 60870-5-101 tel-
econtrol protocol with the system control For the SICAM microRTU, it is possible to
5
center. The SICAM miniRTU makes it pos- use an S7-214 or an S8-216 CPU. The PPI
sible to supplement project-specific func- interface is used for loading the programs
tions. and the parameters and also for communi-
Both units possess the following advantag- cation with the system control center.
es of the SIMATIC S7-200 System in terms The standardized transmission protocol IEC 6
of construction: 60870-5-101 has been implemented. Un-
balanced mode has been chosen as traffic
■ Compact design mode because small remote terminal units
■ Quick mounting by snapping onto a hat are generally operated in partyline (that is
rail to say polling) mode.
■ Low power consumption The SICAM microRTU performs the follow-
7
■ Extensive range of expansion modules ing functions:
– Digital inputs ■ Acquisition and processing of a maxi-
– Relay outputs mum of 24 single point items of infor-
– Electronic outputs mation
– Analog inputs ■ Acquisition and processing of metering 8
– Analog outputs pulses (maximum 20 Hz) for a maximum
■ Connection of expansion modules by of 4 metered values
means of plug-in system ■ Acquisition of a maximum of 12 meas-
■ Connection of process signals by means ured values
of screw terminals ■ Command output as pulse or persistent 9
command for a maximum of 14 digital
■ Automatic recognition of upgrade level
outputs
■ Transmission of data (priority-controlled)
spontaneously or on demand in half du-
plex mode
■ Transmission rate: 300 – 9600 bit/sec
10
Parameterizing takes place with STEP7
MicroWIN. All parameters are preset; they
only have to be adapted slightly. The pa-
rameters are loaded locally from the PC.
For transmission, there is a gradable V.23
hat-rail-mounted modem with an RS-485
interface. The transmission rate is 1200
bit/sec.
SICAM miniRTU
SICAM miniRTU 6MD2020

1
Overview
The SICAM miniRTU differs from a SICAM
microRTU in the following respects:
■ Volume of data: 300 instead of 50 infor-
2 mation points
■ Clock control: messages with time
stamp are possible
■ An integrated V.21 modem is available
■ Project-specific additions can be intro-
3 duced via the API interface
The SICAM miniRTU is a small, efficient
modular remote terminal unit with a wide
range of functions. The SICAM miniRTU
can be upgraded from a configuration level
of 14 digital inputs up to a medium-sized
4 terminal with a maximum of 300 process Fig. 186: SICAM miniRTU with TCM and S7-214 CPU
points.
For the SICAM miniRTU, it is possible to
Functions ■ Acquisition and processing of measured
use the S7-200 CPUs 27-214 or S7-216. In
addition, the TCM (telecontrol module) The SICAM miniRTU performs the follow- values, threshold processing, threshold
5 communication module is required. The ing functions or incorporates the following matchable by means of message.
TCM incorporates an RS-232 interface for features: Transmission with or without time in
communication with the system control message.
■ Acquisition and processing of single
center; this implements the entire mes- ■ Command output as pulse commands
point and double point information. with 1-out-of-n monitoring and command
sage interchange. The standard transmis- Transmission with or without time in
sion protocol is implemented: IEC 60870-5- release. Persistent command output is
6 101, unbalanced mode. IEC 60870-5-101
message. possible.
■ Acquisition and processing of metering
balanced mode and SINAUT 8-FW point-to- ■ Analog setpoint output.
pulses (maximum 20 Hz). Re-storing by
point traffic are in preparation. ■ Bit-by-bit assignment of process infor-
means of internal timer or by means of
Fig. 186 illustrates a minimum configura- message from the system control center. mation to processing functions
tion level of a SICAM miniRTU with an Transmission with or without time in ■ Clock control with synchronization by
7 S7-214 CPU. Fig. 187 shows in diagram- message. message from system control center
matic form a maximum configuration level
with 3 S7-200 CPUs.
2-wire, partyline traffic, transmission on demand
IEC 60870-5-101
unbalanced mode
10
Fig. 187: SICAM miniRTU with TCM and three S7-214 CPUs
SICAM miniRTU
Communication
Communication with the system control To control center
center is carried out by the SICAM miniRTU Point-to-point traffic 1
with the TCM communicaton module.
A gradable V.21 modem is already integrat-
ed in the TCM, so that the SICAM miniRTU
can be used directly.
Other communication characteristics are: 2
■ Transmission speed of 300 – 9600 bit/ SINAUT LSA
sec. adjustable data concentrator
■ Mode control with 15 priorities which
can be freely assigned
■ Different send lists for: 3
– Spontaneous mode
– Polling mode
– Cyclic mode
Linkage of small remote transmission units
generally takes place by means of trans- 4
mission on demand. The lines with the re- 2-wire, polling mode
mote transmission units are compressed
with the aid of a data concentrator and are
relayed to the system control center.
Fig. 188 shows an example of configura-
tion.
5
Rail-mounted modems with RS-232 inter-
face are available for transmission with an
external modem:
Fig. 188: SICAM miniRTU, typical configuration
■ Gradable V.23 modem with 1200 bit/sec
transmission speed 6
■ Dedicated line modem – V.32 modem – Project-specific expansion options
with a transmission speed of 9600 bit/
In the SICAM miniRTU, an API interface
sec.
(Application Program Interface) is availa-
ble. Project-specific programs can thus be
upgraded. Access by the API interface to 7
communication is supported by the sys-
tem. That is to say, the information from
the control center can be processed in the
user program; information derived in the
user program can be remotely controlled. 8
Examples of this are:
■ Formation of group alarms,
■ Transmitting internally formed meas-
ured values or metered values to the
control center, 9
■ Initiating functions by means of com-
mands from the control center,
■ Influencing of alarm processing,
for example filtering, relaying via API,
■ Activating PROFIBUS link on an S7-215.
10
SICAM miniRTU
Engineering
Parameterizing is effected with the plus- Design RTU Type Single point Single Analog Analog Serial ports
1 TOOLS program for miniRTU. The program information 1) commands 1) inputs outputs to CC
can be run on Windows 95, 98 or NT 4.
Parameterizing takes place operator-guided
by means of menus. Extensive help texts SICAM RTU 6MD201 typical up to 2048 2
facilitate operation. Figs. 190 and 191 illus- maximum: 4096
2 trate as examples the mask for hardware
configuration and the mask for assignment SICAM 6MD202 192 2) 192 2) 36 2) 12 2) 1
of message addresses. miniRTU
The parameters are checked for plausibility SICAM 6MD203 24 16 12 4 1
prior to loading. They are loaded in non- microRTU
3 volatile form from the PC into the flash
EPROM of the TCM. All parameters of a 1)
Processing of double point information and double commands is also
SICAM miniRTU can be read locally with possible. The table is intended solely to represent the number
the PC. For this purpose, the parameter of connection points.
set of the station to be read out does not 2)
Maximum values; note combination options!
have to be present on the PC. Modification
4 and reloading is possible.
Fig. 189: Remote terminal units, process signal volumes
8
Fig. 190: plusTOOLS, generation of hardware configuration Fig. 191: plusTOOLS, parameterizing of communication
10
SICAM SAS – Overview
SICAM SAS Overview

1
In order to assure security of supply, the
substation automation system must be ca-
pable in normal operation of real-time ac-
quisition and evaluation of a large volume
of individual items of information.
2
In the event of a fault, additional informa-
tion is required to assist rapid fault diagno-
sis. Graphic display functions, logs and
curve evaluations are aids suitable for this
purpose. The SICAM SAS substation con-
trol and protection system provides a sys- 3
tem solution for efficient implementation
of these functions.
SICAM SAS is designed as an open-type
system which, based on international
standards, provides simple interfaces for 4
integration of additional bay control units or
new transmission protocols, as well as in-
terfaces for implementation of project-spe-
cific automation functions.
Field of application
5
SICAM SAS is used in power transmission
and distribution for automation of medium-
voltage and high-voltage substations.
It is used wherever: 6
■ Distributed processes are to be moni-
tored and controlled.
■ Functions previously available on a high-
er control level are being decentralized Fig.192: SICAM SAS components: SICAM SC Substation Controller,
and implemented locally.
■ High standards of electric insulation
SIPROTEC 4 relays and 6MB525 bay control units 7
strength and electromagnetic compatibil-
ity are demanded. Functions
■ A real-time capability system is required. SAS assumes the following functions in a
■ Reliability is very important. substation:
■ Communication with other control sys-
8
■ Monitoring
tems must be possible. ■ Data exchange with and operation of se-
rially connected protection devices and
other IEDs
■ Local and remote control with interlock
■ Teleindication
9
■ Automation
■ Local processing and display
■ Archiving and logging
10
SICAM SAS – Structure
System architecture
The typical configuration of a SICAM SAS System control center(s) or telecontrol node(s)
1 consists of:
IEC 60 870-5-101
■ SICAM SC Substation Controller GPS SINAUT 8-FW
■ Connection to higher-level system con-
trol centers SICAM plusTOOLS
Configuration
■ Connection to bay level SICAM SC
2 ■ Bay control units, protection relays or Substation
combined control and protection bay Controller
units.
■ Configuration PC with SICAM plusTOOLS
■ Operation and monitoring with SICAM
3 WinCC SIMATIC NET IEC 60870-5-103
The modular construction of the system PROFIBUS FMS
permits a wide range of combination op- wire
RS485 O.F. O.F.
tions within the scope of the system limits.
In the SICAM SC substation controller, the
4 SICAM I/O modules can be used for alter-
native central connection of process inputs
and outputs (see description of the SICAM
RTU).
SICAM WinCC
Operator control, SIPROTEC 4 protection 6MB525 bay SIPROTEC 3
5 monitoring, and control devices control units protection relays
and archiving and 7**6
relays
Fig. 193: Typical configuration of a SICAM SAS
10
SICAM SAS – SC Substation Controller
SICAM SC Substation Controller Hardware Construction

The hardware of the SICAM Substation Like the SICAM RTU, the SICAM SC is
Controller is based on the standard mod- based on the SIMATIC 400. Consequently, 1
The SICAM SC is an open-type, modular
ules of the SIMATIC S7/M7- 400 automa- the statements on construction of the
construction telecontrol and substation
tion system and on additional modules SICAM RTU are also applicable to the
controller. The specific functions of a tele-
which have been developed for the special SICAM SC.
control system are combined with those of
a programmable automation system (PLC). requirements of control and protection.
Standard functions of the automation sys- The following modules form the basic com- Software 2
tem and control and protection-specific plement of the SICAM SC:
The bases of the run-time system (SICAM
applications, such as real-time processing, ■ Power Supply RTC for SAS) in the SICAM SC are to be
fail-safe command output or telecontrol ■ SIMATIC M7- 400 CPU found both on the M7-CPU and on the
functions, combine to form a rugged, (Pentium processor) MCP module real-time operating systems
future-oriented hardware system. ■ MCP (Modular Communication for event-controlled program execution. 3
The basis of the SICAM SC is formed by Processor) Among other things, this assures an es-
the SIMATIC M7- 400 family of systems. In The MCP module is the function module sential requirement for control applications:
order to meet the increased requirements which supports the communication func- State change of information may not be
of telecontrol and substation control tech- tions, such as telecontrol connection to lost or remain unnoticed in critical situa-
nology for electric insulation strength, you tions (→ alarm surge).
now have at your disposal a wide range of
higher-level system control centers, e.g. 4
with the IEC 60870-5-101 protocol, and
modules and devices to supplement the serial connection of bay control units by
SIMATIC standard modules. The communi- means of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol. In
cation processors of the system support addition, it is in SICAM SAS the time mas-
the IEC 60870-5-101, SINAUT 8FW, ter, to which can be connected time signal
IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS FMS, PROFI- receivers for DCF77 or GPS. 5
BUS DP and Industrial Ethernet communi-
cation protocols. Additionally available for the MCP are the
XC2 (eXtension Copper 2 interfaces) and
XF6 (eXtension Fiber optic 6 interfaces)
extension modules for additional communi-
cation interfaces to higher-level system 6
control centers and bay control units
(IEC 60870-5-103).
In addition, the following modules can be
used for supplementary functions in the
SICAM SC:
7
■ For central process connection:
SICAM I/O modules (see description of
the SICAM RTU) and SIMATIC 400
Standard I/O modules (see Siemens Cat-
alog ST 70)
■ For connection of bay control units via 8
Profibus DP and FMS:
SIMATIC 400 communication processor
modules
■ For connection to SICAM WinCC:
SIMATIC 400 modules for Profibus FMS 9
and Industrial Ethernet
10
System security Measured value capturing System capacity

SICAM SAS fulfills to a very considerable ■ Live zero monitoring (4 –20 mA) The maximum configuration of the
1 extent the reliability and security require- SICAM SC substation controller consists
ments imposed on a substation control Command output of:
and protection system. In the case of all Safe command output, i.e. ■ 1 baseframe with 7 to 11 free module
electronic devices incorporated in the locations, dependent on choice of MCP
SAS SICAM System, special attention has ■ Destination monitoring (1-out-of-n)
communication link and
2 been paid to electromagnetic compatibility. ■ Switching current check
■ Maximum of 6 expansion racks,
■ Interference voltage monitoring
Interruption of power supply each with 14 free module locations
■ Determination of the coil resistance
Thus, you have available a maximum of
The SICAM SAS System is designed to be The SICAM SC system provides the follow- 95 free module locations which you can
maintenance-free, that is to say no backup ing five operating modes, thus allowing the equip for example with 95 I/O modules or
batteries are required for restart after user to take into account different safety
3 mains failure. requirements for process output:
a further 4 MCP(4) communication assem-
blies and 75 I/O modules. For connection
Safety functions ■ 1-pole command output of bay control units via PROFIBUS FMS, up
1
■ 1 /2-pole command output to 4 CP443-5 base communication proces-
Hardware self-test: On startup and cyclical- sors can be plugged into the baseframe.
ly in the background. ■ 2-pole command output
1 Each CP443-5 requires one module loca-
4 General check: At start of the transfer time ■ 1 /2-pole command output with separate tion. For connection of PROFIBUS DP de-
system and creep mode in background. command release through CR module vices, an interface module is used which is
■ 2-pole command output with separate plugged into a module shaft of the CPU
Communication command release through CR module module. Connection to Industrial Ethernet
Errors in data transmission due to electro- By combining the CO module with the can be implemented via the CP443-1 com-
magnetic effects, earth potential differenc- CR module, a single error (in case of 11/2- munication processor and will then require
5 es, ageing of components and other sourc- pole command output) in the command one module location. Alternatively, you can
es of interference and noise on the trans- output circuit results in the command not also however use the CP1401 interface
mission channels are reliably detected. being executed. module which is plugged into a module
The safety measures of the protocols pro- Through the test and monitoring measures shaft of the CPU module.
vide protection from: provided by the CR module, which make it Under these conditions, it is possible to im-
6 ■ Bit and message errors possible to distribute the command output plement up to a maximum of 3040 items
■ Information loss circuit to two independent modules, high of information to a SICAM SC via central-
■ Unwanted information requirements are met. ized process connection. With the use of
bay control units – linked to the SICAM SC
■ Separation or interference of assembled
via MCP communication assemblies or
items of information PROFIBUS – it is possible for up to 10,000
7 Priority-controlled message initialization items of information to be managed, for
decentralized process connection.
Messages initiated by events are initialized
quickly (priority-controlled).
Interfaces
Failure indication
8 The failure status is derived in case of:
The variability and expansion capability of
a substation control and protection system
■ Contact chatter depends primarily on its outward interfac-
■ Signalling-circuit voltage failure es. SICAM SAS supports international
standards, such as PROFIBUS, the
■ Module out of order
IEC 60870 5-101 telecontrol protocol or
9 A telecontrol malfunction group alarm can the IEC 60870-5-103 relay communication
be parameterized from individual pieces of protocol and thus assures optimum flexibili-
information, for example: ty of substation planning.
■ MCB trip The SICAM communication modules of the
■ Voice-frequency telegraphy error SICAM SC are equipped with serial inter-
10 ■ Channel error faces (parameterizable as RS232 or as
■ No signalling-circuit voltage RS422/485) and with optical fiber links.
They are combined, according to applica-
■ Module out of order
tion, to form MCP communication assem-
■ Buffer overflow blies which consist of the MCP communi-
cation processor and XC2 and/or XF expan-
sion modules.
Telecontrol interfaces
Via the serial interfaces of the MCP com-
munication processor and the XC2 expan-
Substation bus Telecommunication 1
sion modules, one can connect the SICAM
– Industrial Ethernet – IEC 60 870-5-103
SC to a maximum of three higher-level sys- SINAUT 8FW
tem control centers. – PPROFIBUS FMS
Connection to SICAM Module MCP (XC2, XF6)
The telecontrol interfaces are operated WinCC
with the IEC 60870-5-101 or SINAUT 8FW Module CP443-1 2
transmission protocols and are parameter- or -5
izable as RS232, RS422/RS485 or optical
fiber interfaces.
Bay control unit interfaces

For connection of decentralized items of
3
information via bay control interfaces, vari-
ous options are available:
■ A maximum of 4 CP 443-5 base mod-
ules for connection of bay control units Field bus
with PROFIBUS FMS interface. One 4
can connect a maximum of 48 devices – PROFIBUS FMS IED-communication
(SIPROTEC 4, 6MB525) per module; the Connection to SIPROTEC
total number in the design may not Module CP443-5 – IEC 60 870-5-103
however exceed 96 devices. – PROFIBUS DP protection relays and
■ One IF964-DP interface module for con- DP-“devices“ bay units 5
nection of a maximum of 20 SU200 bay Module IF964 Module MCP (XC2, XF6)
control units and/or SIMEAS measuring
transducers via PROFIBUS DP. For all
Fig. 194: SICAM SC communication interfaces
other bay control units with PROFIBUS
DP interface, the upper limit of 127 de-
vices will apply. 6
■ A maximum of 4 MCP(4) communication Design tools Bay control units
assemblies, each consisting of one MCP
Design of the SICAM SC is carried out with In the design and parameterizing of sub-
communication processor and 4 XF6 ex-
SICAM plusTOOLS which is based on the device connections, SICAM plusTOOLS
pansion modules with optical fiber inter-
SIMATIC basic modules: STEP7, SIMATIC accesses databases which describe the
faces for a maximum of 96 bay control 7
CFC and Borland C/C++. interface complement of the devices.
units (IEC 60870-5-103). Creation of a new protection unit type with
■ A maximum of 1 MCP (1) communica- IEC 60870-5-103 transmission protocol is
tion assembly (consisting of 1 MCP Process visualization made possible by the parameterizer in
communication processor and 1 XC2 ex- For visualization and control of the process, SICAM plusTOOLS.
pansion module) and 1 MCP communi- SICAM WinCC is used; this is based on
cation assembly (consisting of 1 MCP SIMATIC WinCC. Protocols 8
communication processor) for a maxi-
Telecontrol and field bus protocols will in
mum of 186 bay control units via a maxi-
Expandability future be incorporated in modular fashion
mum of 6 RS485 lines (IEC 60870-5-103).
by means of an expansion interface.
Combinations of the above examples are SICAM has been designed for a new gen-
possible, but the quantity of 10,000 infor-
mation points should not be exceeded.
eration of devices and function modules for SIMATIC modules 9
the automation of substations in power Within SICAM SAS, it is possible to use
supply. the SIMATIC Standard I/O modules (see
MPI interface
SICAM integrates complementary and Siemens Catalog ST70, Siemens Compo-
On the CPU module is located 1 MPI inter- compatible product lines and is the logical nents for Totally Integrated Automation.)
face (token ring multipoint-capability bus continuation of proven, available modules.
structure) for design, parameterizing, diag- 10
nostics. By virtue of its open system concept,
SICAM SAS is adaptable to the growing
Time signal reception demands of the future. System expansion
and further development are readily possible.
The MCP communication processor pos-
sesses an interface for receipt of an exter-
nal time signal. Time synchronization is
effected by means of DCF77 or GPS.
SICAM SAS – Bay Control Units
Bay control units 6MB525 Mini Bay Unit

Serial connection of distributed bay control (see description of SINAUT LSA)
1 units allows access to extensive detailed This low-end unit with its limited range of
information about your switchgear in the information is preferably used in single-
substation control and protection system. busbar substations. It can be connected
For this purpose, SICAM SAS offers bay via RS485 with IEC 60870-5-103 or via
control units with differing scope of infor- PROFIBUS FMS to the SICAM SC.
2 mation and function. The range extends,
according to requirements, from pure bay 7SJ531 Combined
control units and protection relays on the Bay Control and Protection Unit
one hand, to combined devices on the oth- (see description of SINAUT LSA and Pow-
er hand which provide the bay protection er System Protection)
and control functions in a single unit.
3 SICAM SAS supports bay control units The 7SJ531 possesses, in addition to pro-
with IEC 60870-5-103, PROFIBUS FMS tection functions, the facility for controlling
and PROFIBUS DP interface. a switching device (also remotely). It can
be integrated in the SICAM SAS with
IEC 60870-5-103 via optical fiber link.
4
Design Type Commands Signal inputs Analog inputs Components
Double Single Double Single Direct Connection
connection to measure
to transformer transducer
5
Compact bay 6MD631 4 – 5 1 4 x I, 3 x U – Bay control units in new
control unit 6MD632 5 + 4 2) 1 12 – 4 x I, 3 x U – design, optimized for medium
(SIPROTEC 4 voltage switchgear with
design with large 6MD633 5 + 4 2) 1 10 – 4 x I, 3 x U 2 11/2-pole control (max. 7
graphic display) 1) switching devices). 2-pole
6 2) control is also possible (with
6MD634 3+4 – 10 – – – max. 4 switching devices).
6MD635 7 + 8 2) – 18 1 4 x I, 3 x U –
also usable as ”single“
6MD636 7 + 8 2) – 16 1 4 x I, 3 x U 2
7
6MD637 4 + 8 2) 1 16 1 – –
Combined control 7SJ610 – 4 – 3 4xI – Combined control and protection

and protection 7SJ612 – 6 – 11 4xI – devices. 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 with
8 device with local 7SJ621 – 8 – 7 4 x I, 3 x U – 4 line text display, 7SJ63 with
bay control 1) graphic display. Optimized for
7SJ622 – 7 – 11 4 x I, 3 x U – 11/2 pole control (max.7
7SJ631 4 – 5 1 4 x I, 3 x U – switching devices). 2-pole
7SJ632 5 + 4 2) 1 12 – 4 x I, 3 x U – control is also possible
(with max. 4 switching devices).
7SJ633 5 + 4 2) 1 10 – 4 x I, 3 x U 2
9 Double commands and alarms
7SJ635 7 + 8 2) – 18 1 4 x I, 3 x U – also usable as ”single“
7SJ636 7 + 8 2) – 16 1 4 x I, 3 x U 2
10 1) 11/2-pole control; 2-pole control possible

2) Second figure is number of heavy duty relays
Fig. 195: Survey of bay units
SICAM SAS – Bay Control Units
SIPROTEC 4
(see description of Power System
Protection) 1
The 7SJ63 and the 6MD63 are designed
for larger volumes of information and thus
are also suitable for use in duplicate-busbar
substations. System control center or telecontrol node
SIPROTEC 4 units are preferably connect-
IEC 80 870-5-101
2
ed to the SICAM SAS via PROFIBUS FMS. GPS SINAUT 8-FW
Connection via IEC 60870-5-103 with re-
duced functionality (compared to the use SIMATIC plusTOOLS
of PROFIBUS FM) is also possible. Configuration
SICAM SC
The SIPROTEC 4 7SJ61 and 7SJ62 relays Substation 3
can also be used via Profibus FMS and Controller
IEC 60870-5-103 in SICAM SAS. These
two units support control of the feeder cir-
cuit-breaker.
Protective relays (V3 type) MPI 4

By means of IEC 60870-5-103, all PROFIBUS FMS
SIPROTEC 3 protective relays (see Power
System Protection, page 6/8), and also pro- Fiber optic OLM
tection relays of other manufacturers supp- cables (Optical Link Module)
orting IEC 60870-5-103 can be connected 5
to the SICAM SC substation controller.
Fiber optic
Other bay control units cables
In addition, the following can be connected SICAM WinCC
to the SICAM SC: Operator control
■ SIMEAS T transducer via
and monitoring, 6
archiving
IEC 60870-5-103
■ SIMEAS Q Power Quality via
PROFIBUS DP
■ Maschinenfabrik Reinhausen transform-
er tap voltage controllers (for example SIPROTEC 4 devices via PROFIBUS FMS 7
VC100, MK30E) via IEC 60870-5-103
■ Eberle transformer tap voltage controller Fig.196: SICAM SAS, connection of SIPROTEC 4 bay control units via PROFIBUS FMS and optical fiber
(RegD) via IEC 60870-5-103
■ SU200 bay control unit for high-voltage
use via PROFIBUS DP 8
■ Decentralized peripherals via PROFIBUS
DP (for example ET200)
10
SICAM SAS – Human-Machine Interface
SICAM WinCC protection systems. One can use them for

designing detail images. The symbols are
In the SICAM SAS substation automation
1 system, SICAM WinCC is the human-ma-
selected from the library and placed in a
detail image using the Drag & Drop func-
chine interface HMI between the user and
tion. The symbols are dynamized. Thus, for
the computer-assisted monitoring and con-
example, there are several different views
trol system.
of a circuit-breaker which visualize the ON,
For efficient system management, numer-
OFF or fault position switching states.
2 ous single information items must be dis-
played quickly and clearly.
The state of the substation must be dis-
played and logged correctly at all times.
Important indications, along with measured
and metered values of past time periods
3 must be archived in such a way that they
are available for specific evaluation in the
form of curves or tables at any time.
The SICAM WinCC human-machine inter-
face meets these requirements for efficient
system management and also provides the
4 user with numerous options for individual
design of the system user interface and
numerous open interfaces for implement-
ing operation-specific functions. The win-
dowing technique of SICAM WinCC makes
5 it easier to work with. In designing the
graphic displays, the user has every degree
of freedom and also has the support of a
pool of predefined substation automation
symbols such as switchgear, transformers
or bay devices.
6 SICAM WinCC consists of the WinCC
process visualization system and SICAM
software components.
■ WinCC
WinCC offers standard function modules
7 for graphical display, for messaging, ar- Fig. 197: Overview diagram in Graphics Designer
chiving and reporting. Its powerful proc-
ess interface, fast display refresh and
reliable data archiving function assure
high availability.
S7-PMC serves as a basis for a chrono-
8 logical messaging and archiving of data.
■ SICAM components
They consist of:
– SICAM symbol library,
– SICAM message management
9 expansion,
– SICAM wizards,
– SICAM processing functions and
– SICAM Valpro, (Measured/ Metered
Value Processing Unit)
10
SICAM symbol library
The SICAM symbol library contains switch-
gear, bay devices, transformers and other
object templates for bay representations
which are typical for substation control and
Fig. 198: Selecting a circuit-breaker from the symbol library
SICAM SAS – Human-Machine Interface
SICAM message management

expansion
The SICAM message management expan-
1
sion ensures a chronological messaging
and archiving of data. On the basis of
S7-PMC, the SICAM Format DLL evaluates
the data and assigns the corresponding
messages to them. Based on this, a milli- 2
second resolution of all events is given and
for every event not only the state of indica-
tion itself is available, but also additional
information without the need for additional
parameterizing effort.
For message assignment, the format DLL 3
recurs to the WinCC text libary. You can
adapt the texts contained in the text library
to meet your project-specific requirements.
SICAM wizards Fig.199: SICAM WinCC event list

4
The SICAM wizards assist the user in cre-
ating a new WinCC project. The following
tasks are carried out with help of the wiz- ■ Taking over messages from SICAM
ards: plusTOOLS:
■ Creating SICAM structure types: The Import SICAM messages wizard 5
The Create SICAM tag structure types helps the user to import messages from
wizard helps the user to generate the SICAM plusTOOLS into WinCC.
structure types for structured tags which This function allows the user to report
are necessary in a SICAM system. information in the message management
Structure types are needed for importing system which was configured and param-
tags from SICAM plusTOOLS. eterized with SICAM plusTOOLS. This 6
function allows the user to visualize
■ Taking over tags from SICAM plusTOOLS:
information from SICAM plusTOOLS
The Import SICAM tags wizard helps to
under WinCC, i.e. to use it in process
import tags from SICAM plusTOOLS
diagrams.
into SICAM WinCC.
■ Creating the SICAM archiving system:
This function allows the user to visualize
The Create SICAM archives wizard helps
7
information, i.e. to represent it in proc-
ess diagrams, configured and parameter- generation of an archiving system under
ized with SICAM plusTOOLS. WinCC. The SICAM WinCC archiving
system consists of:
■ Creating the SICAM message manage-
ment: – a sequence archive for measured
values and 8
The SICAM message management wiz-
– a sequence archive for metered
ard helps the user to generate a mes-
values.
sage management system under WinCC
which meets the specific requirements One can import metered values und meas-
of a substation automation system. ured values from SICAM plusTOOLS into
In addition to a message archive, the this archiving system. 9
SICAM message management includes ■ Integrating the SICAM symbol library:
the following templates: event list, alarm The Import SICAM libary wizard helps
list and protection message list. the user to load the SICAM symbol li-
Each of these lists always contains mes- brary into the current project. One can
sage blocks, message window tem- use the symbol library for designing indi-
plates, message line formats, message vidual detail images. 10
classes, message sequence reports, lay-
outs and texts.
SICAM SAS – Engineering Tools
SICAM Valpro
Curve and tabular display of archived
1 measured values and metered values is
carried out by means of the SICAM Valpro
program. Valpro provides the facility for us-
ing archived values for various evaluation
purposes, without altering them in the ar-
2 chive. The user decides at the time of eval-
uation (in a dialog) which values should be
displayed in which raster. In addition to the
variables to be displayed, he specifies the
time range, the color and if necessary the
mathematical function to be carried out.
3 One can have totals, averages, maximums,
minimums or the power factor formed and
displayed. The calculation interval can be
individually specified. Stored presets can
be altered at any time.
4
Engineering System SICAM plus TOOLS
With SICAM plusTOOLS, a versatile and Fig. 200: Example of curve evaluation using Valpro
powerful system solution is available,
which supports the user efficiently in con-
5 figuring and parameterizing the SICAM
SAS (SICAM Substation Automation Sys-
tem). SICAM plusTOOLS is based on
Windows 95 and Windows NT. Thus the
user moves within a familiar system envi-
ronment and can recur to the well-known,
6 convenient functionality of the Windows
technique.
SICAM plusTOOLS allows a flexible proce-
dure when configuring and parameterizing
a station, while providing consequent user
7 guidance at the same time.
Plausibility checks allow only operations
and combinations which are permissible in
the respective context.
■ Permissible input variables are displayed
8 in drop-down lists or scroll boxes.
■ The Drag & Drop function makes it easy
to group, separate or move data.
■ Context-sensitive help texts explain the
text boxes and the permissible input var-
iables.
9 ■ Copy functions on different levels opti- Fig. 201: Hardware Configuration of a demo station
mize the configuration procedure.
■ Help texts which are organized accord- SIMATIC Manager Hardware Configuration
ing to topics explain the configuration.
The SIMATIC Manager is the platform of The Hardware (HW) Configuration applica-
SICAM plusTOOLS. With the help of the tion serves for configuring the modules
10 The SICAM plusTOOLS Software SIMATIC Manager, the user defines and and their parameters. The configuration is
Package manages the project and calls the individ- represented as a table on the screen. The
The SICAM plusTOOLS configuration sys- ual applications. user chooses the components from a
tem is divided into individual, function-spe- The project structure is created automati- Hardware Catalog and places them into
cific applications. cally in the course of the configuration pro- the hardware configuration window using
cedure. The data areas are organized in Drag & Drop or double-clicks. The tabs for
separate containers. parameterizing the modules are already
In the navigation window of the SIMATIC filled with the default values, which can be
Manager, the project structure is repre- modified by the user.
sented similar to a Windows 95 directory
tree. Each container corresponds to a
folder on the respective hierarchical level.
SICAM SAS – Engineering Tools
COM IED
The COM IED application (Communication
to Intelligent Electronic Devices) serves for
1
configuring the connection of bay devices
in control and monitoring direction.
The bay devices are imported into COM
IED with their maximum information vol-
ume from an IED Catalog using Drag & 2
Drop. The information volume can be re-
duced later. If SIPROTEC 4 bay units with
Profibus FMS communication are used,
then the information parameterized with
DIGSI 4 will be taken over automatically.
3
COM TC
The COM TC application manages all pa-
rameters which are related to the informa-
tion exchange with higher-level control
centers. The telegrams are configured sep- 4
arately for control and monitoring direction.
For the transmission of the telegrams in
monitoring direction, these are assigned to Fig. 202: MCP Parameterizing
priority-specific and type-specific lists. The
list types are provided in a Telecontrol List
Catalog and are copied into COM TC using 5
Drag & Drop.
CFC
In the SICAM SAS System, automation
functions, such as: 6
■ Bay-related and cross-bay interlocks
■ Switching sequences (busbar changes,
etc.)
■ Status indication and command deriva-
tives (group indications, load shedding, 7
etc.)
■ Measured value and metered value
processing (limit value processing, com-
parative functions, etc.)
are projected graphically with the CFC 8
(Continuous Function Chart).
The scope of supply of SICAM plusTOOLS
includes a comprehensive library of SICAM Fig. 203: COM IED and bay units catalog
SAS components. The designer makes his
selection from this library, positions the se- 9
lected component by Drag and Drop on his
worksheet and interconnects the compo-
nents required for its function to one an-
other and to the process signals.
10
Fig. 204: CFC with Component Library
SICAM PCC – System Design
Introduction
1 ICCP (ISO/IEC 870-6 TASE.2)
Changing requirements Link To Control Center SICAM PCC
The ongoing deregulation of the power (Optional)
supply industry has been creating a com-
petitive environment with new challenges
2 for the utilities:
■ The liberalized production, transmission Router
and distribution of electrical power call
for more flexible operation of the power Substation LAN
system resulting in more complex con-
trol, metering and accounting procedures.
3 ■ The deregulated system structure re-
quires the extension of load and quality
of supply monitoring, as well as event
and disturbance recording, to control the
business processes and to care for liabil-
4 ity cases. LAN-Enabled IEDs (Legacy) IEDs
■ Operation data that has traditionally
been used only within a given utility
must now be shared by a number of Fig. 205: Sample Substation with SICAM PCC
players in various locations, such as utili-
ties, independent power producers, sys-
5 tem operators and metering or billing
companies. More effective data acquisi- Legacy Protocol ICCP
tion, archiving and communication is (e.g., DNP, IEC 870-5) (ISO/IEC 870-6
therefore needed. Link To Control Center TASE.2)
■ Competition requires that costs have to
Link To Control
Center(Optional)
6 be reduced wherever possible. The opti-
mization of processes has consequently
been given high priority. System automa-
tion and in particular distribution automa- (Legacy)
tion including automatic meter reading IEDs
and customer load control can therefore SICAM Router
7 be observed as the future trend. Substation SICAM
The SICAM PCC meets these require- Controller PCC
ments by integrating modern PC-technolo-
gy and open communication.
Substation Substation
8 LAN “A” LAN “B”
9 (LAN-Enabled IEDs)
Fig. 206: Sample Substation with SICAM PCC and SICAM SC
10 Some Typical Configurations ■ One or more legacy IEDs, connected to

the PCC in a star configuration.
PC-Based Substation Automation ■ One or more RTUs.
Fig. 203 illustrates a typical configuration ■ ICCP communications to a Control Center
employing the SICAM PCC. The compo- (optional).
nents of such a configuration include: ■ Siemens’ SICAM WinCC Human Machine
■ SICAM PCC. Interface (HMI) (optional component of
■ Substation LAN.
SICAM PCC).
■ One or more LAN Enabled Intelligent
Electronic Devices (IEDs).
A PLC can be added

This, of course, is not the only way in which
the SICAM PCC may be used in a substa- DSI “DSI”
1
tion configuration. Fig. 206 illustrates a API Application
slightly more complex substation configu- Real-Time
ration which includes both the SICAM PCC Data ODBC
User Interface
and the SICAM Substation Controller (SC)1). For Configuration
The SICAM Substation Controller is an 2
advanced Programmable Logic Controller ODBC
(PLC) (see 6/109 and following pages).
DSI Central Status Data
Open-ness Server
A product is not ”open“ just because its ODBC
manufacturer decides to publish the speci- 3
fications of a proprietary communications Configuration Data Configuration
Data
protocol. A product is really open if it sup-
ports standard and de facto industry stand-
ard communications. Status Data
There was a time, not so very long ago, RDBMS 4
when vendors of substation and control
center equipment offered only proprietary Configuration Data
solutions. The designer and maintainer of
substations was forced to choose among a
number of options, many – in fact almost Fig. 207: DSI with RDBMS
all-of which would force the designer to 5
use a proprietary communications protocol.
After the choice, either the future options
became very limited or one was forced to PCC At A Glance The architecture uses the data distribution
deal with the problem of installing protocol subsystem to augment the RDBMS to
gateways. With SICAM, those days are Platform
over. SICAM, and specifically the SICAM
meet those data distribution performance 6
The SICAM PCC executes on Intel-based requirements which the RDBMS cannot
PCC, are designed with ”open-ness“ as a hardware running the Microsoft Windows address.
primary design consideration. Siemens’ NT operating system (Version 4.0 and The presence of both the data distribution
goal in designing this product line is to pro- above). Siemens chose this platform be- subsystem and the RDBMS is largely
vide the tools and features which enable cause it offers an effective combination of transparent to the average user. However,
the user to design and upgrade the substa- low hardware and software cost, ease of for designers and programmers who wish
7
tions the way he wants. use, scalability, flexibility, and easy access to interface to the PCC infrastructure,
The sample configuration diagrams shown to support. Siemens publishes full details of the Appli-
are not meant to illustrate all the possible cations Programming Interface (API) pro-
configurations using the PCC and other Distributed Architecture & Database vided by the data distribution system, in-
components of the SICAM product line. The SICAM PCC uses a high-performance cluding all details of the RDBMS data 8
Rather, they show that the components of data distribution subsystem for distribution model used by SICAM PCC.
the SICAM product line are designed so of real-time data among system compo- DSI (Distributed System Infrastructure) is a
that users may take a ”building block” ap- nents. The data distribution subsystem simple data distribution switch which oper-
proach to designing or upgrading their sub- permits distribution of applications across ates in conjunction with a standard RDBMS.
stations. multiple computers to address perform- While DSI does have some characteristics
ance, physical connectivity and redundan- of a database, it lacks certain others, so it
9
cy requirements. This means that if a con- is not referred to as a database.
figuration contains more devices than can DSI allows distributed applications to share
physically be connected to a single compu- data in a consistent, efficient (i.e. high-per-
ter, one can distribute the system across formance) manner.
multiple computers. Or, if the applications
require more processing power than can There are three basic components which 10
be provided by a single computer, one can make up DSI:
solve the problem by adding additional ■ A central application called the DSI cen-
computers to the system and distributing tral server.
the processing load. ■ A collection of interface functions which
In designing the PCC, the data distribution make up the DSI API.
subsystem was combined with a standard ■ A data model which describes the
1) In PCC version 2.0, WinCC is required for configura- third-party RDBMS. The PCC architecture RDBMS tables used to store the configu-
tions in which there is communication between PCC and uses the RDBMS to do what an RDBMS ration and status information used by DSI
the SICAM Substation Controller. does best – organize and store data. and applications which interface to DSI.
Interfacing to Other Systems

The PCC is designed to be an effective in-
1 tegration platform by including support for
both modern and legacy communications
protocols.
The SICAM PCC does several things to ODBC DSI API
simplify the task of interfacing to other Configuration Real-Time
2 systems: Data Data
■ The interface to PCC’s data distribution
subsystem is fully externalized and doc- Device Master
umented. All interfaces are available for
use by customers or third parties in de-
3 veloping software (including gateways) Device Master API
to interface to the PCC. Siemens pro-
vides a Software Development Kit which
can automatically generate the basis for
a working application, as well as the
user interface windows to configure it. Protocol Module
4 PCC’s DB Gateway feature allows you DSI Central
to use familiar RDBMS tools and tech- RDBMS Server
niques to exchange data with the PCC.
DB Gateway provides a bidirectional
mechanism which may be used to insert
data into the real-time data distribution
5 system via the RDBMS. That is, one can
write an object into the RDBMS using,
for example, SQL statements. DB Gate-
way will retrieve that object from the Fig. 208: Device Master
RDBMS and enter it into the real-time
6 data distribution stream for distribution
to other components of the system.
”Enterprise” Protocols ”Legacy“ Protocols
Similarly, one can configure DB Gateway
to accept data objects from the real-time Siemens is the acknowledged leader in Perhaps the largest problem the user will
data distribution stream and write them delivering ICCP solutions. The PCC’s full- tackle in attempting to upgrade and auto-
into the RDBMS. The user can then read featured ICCP implementation allows com- mate existing substations arises from the
7 them using RDBMS tools and techniques. munication with any system which sup- large number of communications protocols
All of this can be done with almost no ports this popular protocol. PCC’s ICCP used by existing equipment in those sub-
knowledge of the internals of the PCC currently supports Conformance Blocks stations. Many of these devices simply will
architecture – all one needs to know is 1, 2, 5, and 8. not talk to each other. Many of them will
which RDBMS table to read and/or Whenever a power system disturbance not talk to the control center. Even if a com-
which to write. pletely new substation is built, one may
8 occurs or even during normal operations,
face this problem because the choice of
Fig. 208 illustrates the position of Device it is very useful to be able to collect a log
Master in the architecture. In this picture, of changes in one or more data objects. devices may be limited by the suite of pro-
it is easy to visualize a protocol module Many modern field devices (e.g. relays, tocols which are supported by the existing
which is isolated from other system meters, etc.) allow collection of this type SCADA or EMS system.
components while at the same time has of data within the device itself. However, A primary design consideration in the PCC
9 full access to all system services required. many others do not. PCC’s Sequence of is the ability to support legacy1) protocols.
■ Version 2.0 of PCC makes available a Events Logger option allows collection and The ability to support these protocols has
set of ActiveX controls which can be storage to the RDBMS of any data objects been enhanced by a PCC feature called
embedded into an ActiveX container processed by PCC’s data distribution sub- Device Master. It allows Siemens (and
application. This feature is included as a system. Data may be collected either peri- third parties) to develop protocol modules
“proof of concept“ feature to explore odically or ”on event“. Since data are in much less time than would be required
10 the scope of the ability to embed a real- stored into the RDBMS, they may be re- for a traditional system. This means that
time value from PCC’s data distribution trieved for analysis using standard RDBMS more protocols can be made available
subsystem into a “web” document. tools and techniques. more quickly and at reduced cost.
1}”Legacy“, when used to refer to communications

protocols, is an euphemism for ”old and proprietary”.
Data Conditioning Human-Machine Interface.

The SICAM PCC includes the feature Data Frequently, it is desirable for personnel
Normalization (or simply Normalization) working in a substation to have access to 1
which provides a simplified method by HMI displays. If an HMI is available in the
which normalize procedures may be as- substation, costs can be reduced by elimi-
sociated with data objects. These normal- nating or reducing the size of local control
ize procedures perform transformations on panels and the wiring associated with them.
data objects as they enter and leave PCC’s Additionally, well-designed HMI displays 2
data distribution subsystem. The types of can reduce the risk of error by presenting
transformation which may be performed data and controls in a logical schematic rep-
include (but are not limited to): jitter sup- resentation – interlocks can be included to
pression, deadband calculations, linear prevent certain operations or to ”remind”
transformation, and curve-based transfor- personnel to follow certain procedures.
mation. In addition, custom procedures can If an HMI is used in a substation automa- 3
be developed and added to the system to tion and integration system like the PCC,
perform any type of calculation and data it is important to ensure that the HMI inte-
transformation. Up to 16 normalization pro- grates well into the system. The HMI must
cedures may be concatenated and applied be integrated in such a way that it does
to a single data object. PCC’s user inter- not become a performance ”bottleneck”.
face provides a simple, intuitive way to 4
The HMI must not be the ”center” of the
create custom normalization procedures substation automation architecture. No
and associate normalization procedures HMI offers a sufficient level of data distri-
with individual data objects or groups of bution performance to allow it to be used
data objects. as the “center” of the architecture. Anoth-
er strong consideration in integrating an 5
HMI is to ensure that whoever has the job
of configuring the system is not required
to enter data a number of times. Nor should
the HMI require the user to become a com-
puter programmer.
The PCC’s optional HMI Gateway provides
6
a pathway through which data are ex-
changed between PCC’s data distribution
subsystem and the HMI. Point and click
methods are used to select data objects
which are to be exchanged with the HMI. 7
If one adds, for example, a new meter to
the substation and one wants to place
some data from that meter on an HMI
one-line display, only a few mouse clicks
are required to perform the task. Typing
the name of a data object is at no time re- 8
quired. Definition of data objects may be
performed either via PCC’s user interface
or from within the HMI.
The recommended HMI is the WinCC
product from Siemens. While WinCC is a 9
superior product, it is recognized that
some customers have ”standardized” on
another product. The Siemens HMI Gate-
way however is designed to simplify cus-
tomization to meet these requirements.
10
SICAM PCC – User Interface
Fig. 209: PCC Main Configuration Window

5
7 Fig. 210: PCC Configuration Window – Distributed System
User Interface User Interface for Configuration The navigation window has four elements:
The PCC user interface is started just like ■ A Systems folder: By opening this fold-
any other Windows 95 or Windows NT 4.0 er, one sees an icon for each computer
8 The user interface used to configure and
program: in the PCC configuration.
operate the PCC is very much influenced
1. Click on the Start button of the taskbar. ■ An Interfaces folder: By opening this
by de facto industry standards. Specifically,
folder, one sees the interfaces which are
the user interface has a ”look and feel” 2. Select Programs from the menu which
configured on the PCC.
established by Microsoft’s Windows 95. appears.
The great popularity of Windows 95 made ■ A Normalization folder: By opening this
3. Select the SICAM PCC folder from the
9 this an easy decision. The choice of a Win- menu which then appears.
folder, one is able to create custom nor-
dows 95 ”look and feel” means that the malize procedures.
4. Double-click on SICAM PCC.
user interface is familiar to anyone who has ■ A Tools icon: By opening this, one sees
Now a window appears like shown in a number of tools which may be used in
used Windows 95 software. The PCC de-
Fig. 209. configuration mode.
velopment team has worked with Siemens
human factors engineers to make the user It looks like the Windows Explorer of
10 interface as intuitive as possible. Windows 95 and Windows NT 4.0. On
Fig. 210 illustrates the PCC main window
(configuration mode) with several folders
the left is a navigation window. At the top open. In this case, the system is a distrib-
The PCC’s user interface is divided into
is a menu bar and a tool bar. The naviga- uted configuration with two computers.
two parts:
tion window can be undocked and then
■ User Interface for Configuration, also resized or moved around on your screen.
called the PCC Configuration Manager.
■ User Interface for Operation, also called
the PCC Operations Manager.
SICAM PCC – User Interface
When the user wishes to work with an in-

terface or device, it is done by double-click-
ing on the device he wishes to work with. 1
For example, Fig. 211 shows the PCC user
interface after double-clicking on Meter1
(a relay which speaks the DNP 3.0 proto-
col). As one can see in this illustration, a
new window has appeared on the right-
hand side of the PCC main window. In this 2
case, the new window contains a tabbed
display which may be used to select and
rename data objects from Meter1.
If a mistake is made…
3
The user can change interface and device
parameters by double-clicking on the ap-
propriate folders and / or icons. For exam-
ple, by a double-click on the icon for a de-
vice, windows appear which are almost
identical to those used to initially configure 4
the device. By working with these win-
dows, one can make any necessary chang-
es to the PCC configuration.
Fig. 211: Working with an Existing Device
User Interface for Operation 5
The user interface for operation is very
much like what has already been shown.
One can switch between two modes by
clicking on toolbar buttons:
6
selects configuration mode.
selects operational mode.

7
The user interface in operational mode
looks like the illustration in Fig. 212.
Navigation in operational mode is just like
configuration mode. The items displayed 8
on the navigation tree are very similar.
■ Operations Manager: By double-clicking
on this, the Operations Manager is opened
which allows the user to view and con-
trol the status of the software and de-
vices which make up the PCC system. 9
■ Event Log: This is a tool which opens Fig. 212: User Interface (Operation Mode)
the Windows NT event log viewer. It is
used to examine messages which PCC
software places in the event log.
■ SCADA Value Viewer: This is a tool ■ Generic Value Viewer: This is a tool The PCC’s Operations Manager displays 10
which allows the user to examine data which allows the user to view details of are built automatically during system con-
which is being distributed by PCC’s data complex data types used within PCC. figuration. The configuration mode to add a
distribution subsystem. Using this tool, Like the SCADA Value Viewer, it can new interface or device will appear on the
one can verify that changes which occur also be used to view data being distrib- Operations Manager display the next time
in a device are being correctly communi- uted by PCC’s data distribution subsys- the Operations Manager is started.
cated throughout the system. tem. It can also be used to introduce For those who want to customize their dis-
manual changes in data for debugging, play, the PCC user interface provides an
testing, and checkout. interactive tool for customizing colors and
text on status indicators.
SICAM PCC – Application Example
Application example for Sicam PCC

Distributed SICAM PCC Substation control system
The example shows the application of
1 SICAM PCC to a large industrial power
supply system with distributed substa- FO-ETHERNET ICCP
tions. (Fig. 213)
Remote substation 1 has been built com-
pletely new. In the existing substation 2 SICAM PCC SICAM
2 only the secondary equipment has been Win CC PCC
refurbished. Control of both substations
takes place at the operator workstation in
substation 2. The operator workstation in
substation 2 is only used in special cases 2 incoming feeders
for local control (maintenance, emergency
3 control).
CU/RS 485
Substation 1: (IEC 970-5-103)
Consists of two half-bars, each with 2 in-
coming cable bays and 8 outgoing feeder CU/RS 485
4 bays.
The incoming feeder bays are all equipped … …
with a bay control unit 6MD63 for com-
mand output, data acquisition and local bay
control. In addition, cable differential pro- 8 outgoing feeders
tection 7SD600 and overcurrent protection
5 relays 7SJ600 are also provided.
2 incoming feeders
The outgoing feeders each have a com-
bined protection and control relay 7SJ63,
providing overcurrent protection and bay-
related measuring, data acquisition and
control functions.
6 The SICAM PCC station serves in this sub-
station predominantly as data concentrator CU/RS 485
and communication node for the distribut-
ed bay units. The connection of the bay …
units is established by a copper-based mul-
7 ti-drop link (RS 485 bus) according to the
IEC 870-5-103 standard. 8 outgoing feeders
Substation 2: Substation 2 Substation 1

Combined protection and control relays
7SJ63 are used in this substation in all
8 feeder bays. Connection to the substation Fig. 213: System Configuration
control system SICAM PCC is again estab-
lished with the wired RS485-bus as in sub-
station 1. This configuration provides numerous facil-
The SICAM PCC, located in the control ities for expansion. Thus, for example, it
9 room of this substation, is designed as a is possible to expand bays in each of the
full server and uses WinCC as operating remote stations and to link the devices on
and monitoring tool. The data concentrator the bay level necessary for protection and
SICAM PCC of substation 1 is connected control via Profibus or IEC 60 870-5-103 to
to this common SICAM PCC control sta- the existing PCC. Additional devices can
tion in substation 2 via an optical fiber net- also be connected to the control room
10 work using the network-capable protocol PCC. For expansion of a complete remote
IEC 60870-6 TASE.2. station, it is possible for example to use
a further Device Interface Processor as
SICAM PCC, to which in turn devices on
the bay level are connected. For expansion
of the operating and monitoring function,
it is possible, instead of the Single-User
WinCC System, to use for example a
WinCC Client Server System with several
operator terminals. This system offers re-
dundancy as an option.
Device Dimensions
6MB5515 1
Front view Side view Rear view
482.6 251
30
37.4
84 E = 426.72 182
2
7
57.15
6 U = 266.7
57.15 133.35
FP/LPII
…
AR
DE
DE
BA
BA
RK
RK
SC
AE
SV
BF
11
465.1
4
Fig. 214: Enhanced RTU 6MB551
5
6MB5540
Front view Side view Rear view

482.6 6
456.1 217
37.4
84 TE = 426.72 182
7
3 U m = 266.87
7
57.15
57.15 133.35
… … Subrack
FPI
AR
BA
BA
RK
AE
SV
8
11
9
471.2
10
Connection
board
90
45
One screw terminal block at top, one at bottom,

per transducer module (two of each per module BF)
Fig. 215: SINAULT LSA COMPACT 6MB5540, basic frame
Device Dimensions
1 6MB5130
Side view Rear view Panel cutout
2 29.5 172 37 39 7.3 225 7.3 206.5

13.2 220 13.2 180 5.4
3 ø 5 or M4
266 244 245 255.8
4 ø6
277.5 221
5
Fig. 216: Compact central control unit 6MB513
6
6MB5140

7
29.5 172 37 39 7.3 450 7.3 431.5
13.2 445 13.2 405 5.4
8
ø5
266 245 255.8
9 ø6
277.5 446
10
Fig. 217: Compact central control unit 6MB514
Device Dimensions
6MB522 Side view Rear view Panel cutout

7.3
1
FSMA 30 29.5 220 206.5
optical-fiber 180 5.4
connector
4 2
ø 5 or M4
244 266 245 255.8
ø6 3
231.5
All dimensions in mm. 277 225 221
Fig. 218: Compact input/output device 6MB522 4
6MB523 Front view Side view Panel cutout
145 30 29.5 7.3 131.5 5

105
ø6
ø5
6
244 245 255.8
7
All dimensions in mm. 160 5.4
231.5 146
Fig. 219: Compact input/output device 6MB523
8
6MB524-0, 1, 2 Side view Rear view Panel cutout
29.5 30 225
172 9 7.3 206.5±0.3
220 13.2 180±0.5 5.4 9
8
7
6 ø 5 or M4
5
266 FE D C BA
245+1 255.8±0.3 10
244
4
3
2 ø6
1
Terminal Terminal Optical-fiber 221+2

All dimensions in mm. blocks blocks sockets
Fig. 220: Compact I/0 unit with local (bay) control 6MB524-0,1,2
Device Dimensions
6MB5240-3, -4
1

30 450 7.3 431±0.3
2 29.5 172 9
445 13.2 405±0.5 5.4
8
7
6
3 5
266 244 245+1 255.8±0.3
ML K J H G F E D C BA
4
3 ø5 ø6
2
1
4
Terminal Terminal Optical-fiber 446+2
block block sockets
5 Fig. 221: Compact I/0 unit with local (bay) control, extended version 6MB5240-3
6MB525
6
29.5 172 37 75 71+2

70
7.3 56.5±0.3
7
ø5
or
M4
8 266 244 245+1 255.8±0.3
Terminal
block ø6
9
Fig. 222: Minicompact I/0 device 6MB525

10
Device Dimensions
Case for 6MD631/632/633/634/637

1
172/6.77 34 225/8.85 221/8.70

29.5
1.16 1.33 220/8.66 2
ø 5 or M4/
0.2 diameter 3
266/10.47 244/9.61 245/ 255.8/
9.64 10.07
FO
2
0.07 SUB-D
Connector ø 6/0.24 diameter
4
RS232- 180/7.08
Mounting plate
port 206.5/8.12
Fig. 223: 6MD63 in 1/2 flush-mounting case for surface mounting with detachable operator panel 5
Case for 6MD63

6
Side view Rear view Side view Rear view
29.5 27.1 450/17.71 225/8.85

Mounting 445/17.51 29 30 220/8.66
1.16 1.06 202.5/7.97 1.14 1.18
plate 7
8
266/ 246.2/ 266/ 312/12.28 244/9.61
10.47 9.69 10.47 FO
2
0.07
9
Connection cable
RS232- 68 poles to basic SUB-D
port unit length 2.5 m/ Connector
Mounting plate
8 ft., 2.4 in
Detached 1M case 1/2 case1) 10
operator panel
1) applicable to 6MD631/632/633/634/637
1) applicable to 6MD635/636
Fig. 224: 6MD63 in 1/2 and 1/1 surface mounting case (only with detached operator panel, see Fig. 42, page 6/21)
Device Dimensions
1 6MB552

2
29.5 172 39 220 7.3 206.5 ±0.3
8 13.2 180 ±0.5 5.4
3
Bus cover
ø 5 or M4
266 244 BNC socket for 1) 2) 255.8 ±0.3
antenna 245+1
4
ø6
Optical-fiber socket
FSMA for connection
of bay units
5 225 221+2
6 Fig. 225: Compact RTU 6MB552 in 7XP20 housing
6MB5530-0 and -1
7
Front view Side view Rear view Wall mount
8 300 1.5 200 20 18

A
20
35 20 8
9 20 8.2
10
400
10 25 Section A-A
45
15 A
225
Cable bushing
Fig. 226: Minicompact RTU 6MB5530
Power Quality
Measuring, Recording, Compensation
Introduction The IEC series 1000 and the standards

IEEE 519 and EN 50160 describe the com-
patibility level required by equipment con- 1
For more than 100 years, electrical energy nected to the network, as well as the lim-
has been a product, measured, for exam- its of emissions from these devices. This
ple, in kilowatt-hours, and its value was requires the use of suitable measuring in-
determined by the amount of energy sup- struments in order to verify compliance
plied. In addition, the time of day could be with the limits defined for the individual
considered in the price calculation (cheap characteristics as laid down in the relevant 2
night current, expensive peak time tariffs) standards.
and agreements could be made on the If these limit values are exceeded, the pol-
maximum and minimum power consump- luter may be requested to provide for cor-
tion within defined periods. The latest de- rective action.
velopment shows an increased tendency
to include the aspect of voltage quality into
3
the purchase orders and cost calculations. Competitive advantage though
Previously, the term “quality” was associ- power quality
ated mainly with the reliable availability of In addition to the requirements stated in
energy and the prevention of major devia- standards, the liberalization of the energy
tions from the rated voltage. Over the last markets forces the utilities to make them- 4
few years, however, the term of voltage selves stand out against their competitors,
quality has gained a completely new sig- to offer energy at lower prices and to take
nificance. On the one hand, devices have cost-saving measures. These demands re-
become more and more sensitive and de- sult in the following consequences for the
pend on the adherence to certain limit val- supplier:
ues in voltage, frequency and waveshape; ■ The energy tariffs will have to reflect the
5
on the other hand, these quantities are in- quality supplied.
creasingly affected by extreme load varia-
■ Customers polluting the network with
tions (e.g. in steelworks) and non-linear
consumers (electronic devices, fluorescent negative effects on power quality will
lamps). have to expect higher power rates –
“polluter-must-pay” principle. 6
■ Cost saving through network planning
Power Quality standards and distribution is different from today’s
The specific characteristics of supply volt- practice in network systems, which is
age have been defined in standards which oriented towards the customers with
are used to determine the level of quality the highest power requirements. 7
with reference to The significant aspect for the customer is
■ frequency that non-satisfying quality and availability of
power supply may cause production losses
■ voltage level
resulting in high costs or leading to poor
■ waveshape product quality.
■ symmetry of the three phase voltages.
Examples are in particular
8
These characteristics are permanently in-
■ Semiconductor industry
fluenced by accidental changes resulting
from load variations, disturbances from ■ Paper industry
other machines and by the occurrence of ■ Automotive industry (welding processes)
insulation faults. In contrast to usual com- ■ Industries with high energy requirements 9
modity trade, the quality of voltage de- Siemens offers a wide range of products
pends not only on the individual supplier including different types of recording equip-
but, to an even larger degree, on the cus- ment, as well as systems for active quality
tomers. improvement.
10
Power Quality
Measuring and Recording
The SIMEAS T Measuring Serial interface

Transducer Block diagram
1
SIMEAS T is a new generation of measur-
RS 232
ing transducers for quantities present in UH RS 485
electrical power supply systems. The com- Digital output
2 pact housings are mounted to a standard
rail with the help of a snap-on mechanism.
Depending on the specific application, the IL1
devices are available with or without auxil- Analog output 1
iary power supply or can be provided with IL2
a multi-purpose measuring transducer which
3 can be configured according to individual
IL3
requirements.
Analog output 2
Applications UL1
■ Electrical isolation and conditioning UL2
4 of electrical measurands for further
processing. UL3 Analog output 3
■ Industrial plants, power plants and N AC
substations.
■ Easy-to-instal, space-saving device.
Fig. 227: Measuring transducer 7KG60, block diagram
5
Front view
75
Fig. 228: Measuring transducer 7KG60

90
8
Side view
Connection terminals
10
90
105
All dimensions in mm
Fig. 229: Measuring transducer 7KG60, dimensions
Power Quality
Functions Outputs Serial interface

Conversion of the measured values into ■ 3 isolated outputs for ± 20 mA or ± 10 V Standard-type RS 232 C (V.28) interface for
analog or digital values suitable for systems and smaller values, connection to a personal computer for con- 1
in the fields of automatic control, energy ■ 1 contact, definable for error or limit indi- figuration, calibration and transfer of the
optimization and operational control. cation or as energy pulse, measured values; an RS 485-type serial in-
■ 1 serial interface type RS 232C (V.28) or, terface is available with an additional bus
Special features function according to IEC 60 870-5-103.
as an option, type RS 485 for connection
■ Minimum dimensions, to a personal computer for configuration
Auxiliary power
2
■ Short delivery time, standard types and data transmission.
delivered ex-warehouse, Two versions: 24 to 60 V DC and 110 to
Types of connection 250 V DC, as well as 100 to 230 V AC.
■ Complies with all relevant standards,
■ High-capacity output signals, ■ Single-phase,
Characteristic line with breakpoint
■ Electrical isolation at high test voltage, ■ Three-wire three-phase current with 3
constant/balanced load, The start and end periods of the analog
■ Suitable to extend the beginning and end
■ Three-wire three-phase current with outputs can be extended according to re-
of the measuring range,
any load, quirements. This enables enlarging of the
■ Design variants for true r.m.s measure- display of the operating range of voltages,
ment. ■ Four-wire three-phase current with
constant/balanced load, while the less interesting overcurrent
Additional features of the multi-purpose
■ Four-wire three-phase current with
range can be compressed. 4
measuring transducers:
any load, Configuration and adjustment
■ Acquisition of up to 16 measurands, ■ Connected either directly or via external
■ Connection to any type of single-phase transformer. With the help of a personal computer con-
or three-phase systems, 16 2/3, 50, nected to the serial interface, the type of
Measured and calculated quantities network, the measurands and the output
60 Hz,
signals can be configured to suit the indi-
5
■ 3 electrically isolated outputs, ± 10 V and ■ R.m.s. values of the line-to-line and star
± 20 mA, vidual situation. The SIMEAS PAR software
voltages,
program enables easy adjustment of the
■ 1 binary output, ■ R.m.s. value of the zero sequence voltage, devices to different requirements. Since
■ Type of network, measurand, measuring ■ R.m.s. value of the line-to-line currents, only one type needs to be kept on stock,
range, etc. can be freely programmed, ■ R.m.s. value of the zero sequence current, the user can benefit from the advantages 6
■ V.28 or RS 485 serial interface for con- ■ Active and reactive power of the single of reduced storage costs and easier project
figuration and output of the measured phases and the sum thereof, planning and ordering procedures. The soft-
values. ware also supports and facilitates the ad-
■ Power factors of the single phases and
Measurands the sum thereof, justment of the transducers.
■ Total apparent power, 7
■ AC voltage,
■ Active energy, incoming supply at the Data output with SIMEAS T PAR
■ AC current,
single phases and the sum thereof
■ Extension of the measuring range is SIMEAS T PAR can also be used to contin-
(pulses),
possible. uously collect the data of 12 measurands
■ Active energy, exported supply at the from the transducer and to display them
Additional features of the multi-purpose single phases and the sum thereof both graphically and numerically on the 8
measuring transducer: (pulses), screen. These data can then be saved or
■ AC voltage and current, ■ Reactive energy, inductive, at the single printed.
■ Active, reactive and apparent power, phases and the sum thereof (pulses),
power factor, phase angle, ■ Reactive energy, capacitive, at the single Bus operation with IEC protocol
■ System frequency, phases and the sum thereof (pulses), The transducer is suitable for the acquisi-
■ Energy pulses, Line frequency. tion of up to 43 measurands and for the 9
■ Limit-value monitoring. monitoring of up to 39 measurands. With
Alarm contact three analog outputs and one contact out-
Special features of the parameterizable put only part of these data can be trans-
multi-purpose measuring transducer ■ Violation of the min./max. limits for ferred. With the help of the RS 485 serial
voltage, current, active power, reactive interface which uses the IEC 60 870-5-103
Input quantities power, frequency, protocol, however, any number of meas-
10
■ 3 voltage inputs for 0 –346 V, up to 600 V ■ Violation of the min. limit for power ured data can be transmitted to a central
line-to-line voltage in the three-phase factor, unit (e.g. LSA or PC). As this protocol re-
system, ■ Functional error. stricts the number of data units to 9 or 16
■ 3 current inputs for 0–10 A. measuring points, the function parameters
for file transfer can be assigned in such a
way as to bypass this restriction and to
load any desired number of data.
Power Quality
SIMEAS T PAR parameterization

software
1
Description
By means of the SIMEAS T PAR software,
SIMEAS T transducers with an RS232 or
an RS485 interface can be parameterized
2 or calibrated swiftly and easily. Measured
quantities can be displayed on the PC on-
line via a graphical meter or can be record-
ed and stored over a period of up to one
week.
SIMEAS T PAR was designed for installa- Fig. 230: Parameterization of the basic parameters Fig. 231: Parameterization of the binary output
3 tion on a commercially available PC or lap-
top with the MS-DOS operating system. It
is operated via the MS-Windows V3.1 or
Windows 95 graphical user interface by PC
mouse and keyboard. Operating instructions
4 can be created by printing the ”Help“ file.
Communication with the transducer is a-
chieved by means of a cable (optionally
available) connected via the interface that
is available on every PC or laptop. For units
featuring an RS232 interface, use the con-
5 necting cable 7KG6051-8BA or, for units
featuring an RS485 interface, use the con-
verter 7KG6051-8EB/EC. Three mutually
independent program sections can be Fig. 232: Parameterization of an analog output Fig. 233: Calibrating an analog output
called up.
6 Parameterization Features Calibration
Parameterization serves to set the trans- ■ Extremely simple and straightforward As the transducer features neither setting
ducer to the required measured quantities, operation potentiometers nor other hardware con-
measuring ranges and output signals etc. ■ Storage of parameterization data under trols, it is calibrated easily by means of the
Users are able to parameterize the trans- a user-defined name even without the SIMEAS T PARA software, by selection of
7 ducer themselves in only a few steps. transducer the ”Calibrate“ function.
Entry of the data in the windows provided ■ Parameters are sent to transducers even Generally, all the transducers are already
is clear and simple, supported with ”Help“ after installation on the site calibrated and factory-set when delivered.
windows. ■ When ”Receive“ is selected, the trans- Recalibration of the transducers is normally
Parameterization is also possible without ducer‘s parameters are read into the only necessary after repairs or in the event
8 the transducer. After storage of the data ”Parameterization window“, can be of readjustment.
under a separate name, the transducers modified and can be sent back by select-
It goes without saying that the windows
can be adjusted with the ”Send file“ coming ”Send“
and graphical characteristics displayed in
mand. They can also be reparameterized ■ Entered data is subjected to an exten- the ”Calibrate“ program can be operated
online during operation. sive plausibility check and a message with ease.
and ”Help“ are displayed in the event of
9 invalid inputs Here also, the test setup and explanations
of how to operate the programm are pro-
■ A parameterization list with the specific
vided in ”Help“ windows.
connection diagram of the transducer
can be printed Features
■ A self-adhesive data plate can be printed
■ Sealed for life design
10 and affixed to the transducer, including a
■ Calibration without tools or special
possibility of entering three lines of text
containing the name and location etc. devices
■ When units featuring an RS485 interface ■ No test field environment is needed
are chosen, an additional window is Current inputs, voltage inputs and the indi-
available for entry of the bus parameters vidual analog outputs can be calibrated in-
dependently of one another.
Power Quality
Reading out data

With graphical instruments, all measured
quantities calculated in the transducer and 1
power quantities can be displayed online
on a PC or laptop, and either in analog
form or digitally.
To improve the resolution of the graphics,
users can freely choose the number of in- 2
struments on the screen and can freely as-
sign the measured quantity and measuring
range.
These are selected and assigned independ-
Fig. 234: Measured value display with 3 measured Fig. 235: Measured value display with 6 measured
quantities quantities
ently of the unit’s analog outputs. 3
Displayed measured values can be stored,
printed or recorded for the EVAL evaluation
software.
Features
■ Online measurements in the system
4
with high accuracy
■ The meters for the 3 analog outputs
with the appropiate measuring range ap-
pear automatically when the program
part is called up 5
■ Easy addition or modification of meters
with measured quantity and measuring
range
■ Selection of measured quantities inde-
pendently of the analog outputs 6
■ Storage of the layout under a file name
■ Printing of the instantaneous values of
the displayed measured quantities
■ Recording and storage of measured val-
ues for the EVAL evaluation software
7
SIMEAS EVAL evaluation software
Fig. 236: SIMEAS EVAL, overview recorded values
Description
With a PC or a notebook with the SIMEAS T 8
PAR software installed on it, up to 25 meas-
ured quantities can be displayed and re-
corded online with the SIMEAS T digital
transducer. A maximum of one week can
be recorded. Every second, one complete
set of measured values is recorded with 9
time information. The complete recording
can then be saved under a chosen name.
Using the SIMEAS EVAL evaluation soft-
ware, the stored values can then be edit-
ed, evaluated and printed in the form of 10
a graphic or a table (Figs. 236 to 238).
Fig. 237: After setting cursors in the overview, the affiliated measurements and times are displayed in the table
Power Quality
SIMEAS EVAL is a typical Windows pro-

gram, i.e. it is completely Windows-orient-
1 ed and all functions can be operated with
the mouse or keyboard.
SIMEAS EVAL is installed together with
SIMEAS T PAR and is started by double
clicking on the EVAL icon. A window con-
2 taining the series of measurements record-
ed by SIMEAS T PAR is displayed for se-
lection.
Features
■ Automatic diagram marking
3 ■ Graphic or tabular representation
■ Sampling frequency: 1 s
■ A measured value from the table can
be dragged to the graphic by simply
right-clicking it
4 ■ Add your own text to graphics
■ Select measured quantities and the
measuring range Fig. 238: When a cursor is moved by the mouse,
the measured values and times in the table are adapted automatically
■ Easy zooming with automatic adaption
of the diagram captions on the X and Y
5 axes
— — —
■ Up to 8 cursors can be set or moved 1000√ 3, 110√ 3, 200√ 3. The devices can
anywhere be pre-configured at the factory according
■ Tabular online display of the chosen to customer requirements or configuration
cursor positions with values and times can be performed by the customer himself.
■ Characteristics can be placed over one The latter possibility facilitates and consid-
6 another for improved analysis erably reduces the customer’s expense for
storage and spare parts service. All usual
■ The sequence of displayed measured
variants of connection (two, three or four-
quantities can be selected and modified
wire systems, constant/balanced or any/
■ The complete recording or edited unbalanced load 16 2/3, 50, 60 Hz) can be
graphic can be printed, including a possi- configured according to individual require-
7 bility of selecting the number of curves ments.
on each sheet
Please note that two different types are
■ The table can be printed with measured
available which differ in their types of inter-
values and times pertaining to the cursor
face: V.28 (RS 232C) and RS 458. The stand-
positions.
ard interface (V.28) is used for configuration.
8 It enables loading of the measured values
Information for SIMEAS T Project to a personal computer, whereby only one
Planning transducer can be connected to a com-
The transducer is suitable for low-voltage puter. Both versions are operated with
applications, 400 V three-phase and 230 V the SIMEAS PAR software. The RS 485
enables connection to a bus, i.e. up to
9 single-phase voltages, (max. measuring
31 transducers can be connected to a cen-
600 L-L) and currents of 1, 5, 10 A (max.
measurement 12 Ar.m.s), either directly or tral device (e.g. PC) simultaneously. Data
via current transformers, as well as for transmission is based on IEC 60 870-5-103
connection to voltage transformers of protocol.
The type of power supply is to be speci-
10 fied when ordering, either 24..60 V DC or
100..230 V AC/DC. Please note that analog
output 1 and the serial interface use the
same potential and can be operated simul-
taneously only under certain conditions.
Power Quality
Power Meter SIMEAS P

Front view
SIMEAS P 1
The SIMEAS P power meter is suitable for
SIMEAS P panel mounting. The digital multi-function
display can replace any measuring devices
usually required for a three-phase feeder.
Furthermore, it offers a variety of addition-
al functions. The optional equipment with a 2
96 (3.78")
PROFIBUS enables centralized access to
the measured values.
Application
All systems used for the generation and 3
distribution of electrical power. The device
can be easily installed for stationary use.
96 (3.78")
Functions
Measuring instrument for all relevant
Side view measurands of a feeder. Combination of 4
several measuring instruments in one unit.
Special features
Dimensions for panel mounting according
to DIN (front frame 96 x 96 mm). Integrated 5
PROFIBUS as optional equipment. Data
86 (3.39") output is effected via the Profibus.
Measuring inputs
■ 3 voltage inputs up to 347 V (L-E), 600 V
(L-L),
6
■ 3 current inputs for 5 A rated current,
measuring range up to 10 A with an
162.2 (6.39") overload of 25%.
Communication 7
Fig. 239: Power Meter SIMEAS P, views and dimensions ■ LCD display with background illumina-
tion,
■ Simultaneous display of four measuring
values,
■ Parameter assignment by using the keys 8
on the front panel,
■ 1 serial interface type RS 485 for con-
nection to the Profibus (option).
10
Power Quality
Auxiliary power
Two versions: 24 to 60 V DC and 85 to SIMEAS P
1 240 V AC/DC.
Measured and calculated quantities

■ R.m.s. values of the line-to-ground or
line-to-line voltages and the mean value,
2 ■ R.m.s. values of the line-to-line currents SHORTING BLOCK or TEST BLOCK
and the mean value,
■ Line frequency,
■ Power factor (incl. sign),
■ Active, reactive and apparent power,
3 separately for each phase and as a Barrier-type
whole, imported supply, terminals
(ring or spade
■ Total harmonic distortion (THD) for volt- connectors)
age and currents, separately for each PROFIBUS
phase, up to the 15th harmonic order, DE
Thumbscrew PWR
4 ■ Unbalanced voltage and current,
Active and reactive power (import,
export), total sum, difference,
■ Apparent power, total sum, Chassis ground
■ Minimum and maximum values of most AWG 14
quantities. (2.5 mm)
5 V V V V
N– L+ G Captured-wire
Basic Function terminals
Display of the measured quantities and
transfer to the Profibus.
6 Information for Project Planning Fuses 2 Amp

The SIMEAS P can be delivered in differ-
ent designs varying with regard to the
measuring voltage, auxiliary voltage, line Power supply connections,
frequency and type of terminals. It is always phase voltage and current Phase voltage and
7 designed for four-wire connection at any connections, and fuse, power supply connections:
AWG 12 to AWG 14
load. The measuring voltages are: CT and PT details depend
on the configuration of the (2.5 mm to 4.0 mm)
■ 120 V, 277 V, 347 V L-N for screw
power system.
clamps, up to max. 277 V for self-
clamping contacts.
8 ■ The basic rated current value is 5 A; Fig. 240: Power Meter SIMEAS P, back panel diagram
fully controlled it is 10 A.
Two variants are to be considered for
the auxiliary voltage: standard version
and 85–240 V AC/DC and, as an option
20–60 V DC.
9 The standard version of the device can be
used only for the display of the different
measurands. Communication with a cen-
tralized system is possible only in connec-
tion with the Profibus which can be or-
10 dered as optional equipment.
Power Quality
The SIMEAS Q Quality Recorder Front view

1
SIMEAS Q is a measuring and recording
device which enables monitoring of all
PROFIBUS-DP 20 21 22 23 24 25
characteristics related to the voltage quali-
ty in three-phase systems according to SIMEAS Q RUN BF DIA
the specifications defined in the standards 7KG-8000-8AB/BB 75
EN 50160 and IEC 61000. It is mounted on 2
a standard rail with the help of a snap-on
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
mechanism.
Application
Fig. 241: The SIMEAS Q quality recorder
Medium and low-voltage systems. 90 3
The device requires only little space and
can be easily installed for stationary use. Communication Side view
Functions ■ 2 optorelays as signaling output, availa- Terminal block
ble either for
Instrument for network quality measure-
ment. All relevant measurands and operands
– device in operation, 4
– energy pulse,
are continuously recorded at freely defina-
– signaling the direction of energy flow
ble intervals or, if a limit value is violated,
(import, export),
the values are averaged. This enables the
– value below min. limit for cos ϕ,
registration of all characteristics of voltage
– pulse indicating a voltage dip,
quality according to the relevant standards.
■ 3 LEDs indicating the operating status 5
The measured values can be automatically
transferred to a central computer system and PROFIBUS activity,
at freely definable intervals via a standard- ■ 1 RS 485 serial interface for connection
ized PROFIBUS DP interface and at a to the PROFIBUS.
transmission rate of up to 1.5 Mbit/s. Auxiliary power 90
105 6
Special features Two versions: 24 to 60 V DC and 110 to
■ Cost-effective solution. 250 V DC, as well as 100 to 230 V AC.
Connection terminals
■ Comprehensive measuring functions Measured and calculated quantities
which can also be used in the field of 20 21 22 23 24 25
■ R.m.s. values of the line-to-ground or
automatic control engineering.
line-to-line voltages,
7
■ Minimum dimensions. PROFIBUS-DP Aux. Volt.
■ Integrated PROFIBUS DP.

■ R.m.s. values of the line-to-line currents,
SIMEAS Q
■ The integrated clock can be synchro-
■ Line frequency (from the first voltage 7KG-8000-8AB/BB
nized via the PROFIBUS. Configuration input),
and data output via PROFIBUS DP. ■ Active, reactive and apparent power,
separately for each phase and as a
Input: Current AC Input: Volt. AC
IL1 IL1 IL2 IL2 IL3 IL3 ULN UL1 UL2 UL3
8
Measuring inputs whole,
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
3 voltage inputs, 0 – 280 V, ■ Harmonics for voltages and currents up
3 current inputs, 0 – 6 A. to the 40th order,
All dimensions in mm
■ Total harmonic distortion (THD), voltages
and currents of each phase,
Fig. 242: The SIMEAS Q quality recorder,
9
■ Unbalanced voltage and current in the dimension drawings
three-phase system,
■ Flicker irritability factor.
Averaging intervals
10
■ Voltages and currents from 10 ms to
60 min.,
■ Other quantities from 1s to 60 min.
Power Quality
Operating modes
■ Continuous measurement with definable Single phase – alternating current
1 averaging intervals,
■ Event-controlled measurement with Connection terminals SIMEAS Q
definable averaging intervals. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Storage capacity
k l
2 Up to 20,000 measured and calculated val-
ues. Parameters for the measuring points L1
can be freely defined. The PROFIBUS DP K L
N
enables quick loading of the measured val-
ues, so that the apparently small storage
capacity is absolutely sufficient. Assuming
3 a usual parameter setting with regard to 4-wire – 3-phase with any load (low voltage network)
the measuring points and averaging inter-
vals for quality monitoring, the storage
Connection terminals SIMEAS Q
capacity will last for seven days in case
of a PROFIBUS failure. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
4 Basic Functions
k l k l k l
In the course of continuous measurement,
the selected measuring data are stored in L1
K L
the memory or transferred directly via the L2
PROFIBUS. The averaging interval can be K L
L3
5 selected separately for the different meas- N
K L
urands.
In the event-controlled mode of operation,
the data will be stored only if a limit value
has been violated within an averaging inter- 3-wires – 3-phase with any load
6 val.
Apart from the mean values, the maximum Connection terminals SIMEAS Q
and minimum values within an averaging 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
interval can be stored, with the exception
of flicker irritability factors and the values
from energy measurement. k l k l u v u v
7
Parameter assignment and adjustment of
the device are performed via the Profibus U V U V
interface. L1
K L
L2
L3
8 Information for SIMEAS Q Project K L
Planning
Up to 400 V (L-L), the device is connected
directly, or, if higher voltages are applied, 4-wire – 3-phase with any load (high voltage network)
via a external transformer. The rated cur-
9 rent values are 1 and 5 A (max. 6 A can
Connection terminals SIMEAS Q
be measured) without switchover. Commu-
nication with the device is effected via 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
PROFIBUS DP or, as an option, via modem
(telephone network). u u u
k l k l k l
Auxiliary voltage is available in two vari-
10 ants: 24 to 60 V DC and 110 to 250 V DC
or 100 to 230 V AC. X X X
U U U
L1
K L
L2
K L
L3
K L
N
Fig. 243: SIMEAS Q connection terminals
Power Quality
The SIMEAS N Quality Recorder Communication Function

■ 1 input for trigger signal, Continuous measurement without storage
■ 1 contact as alarm output, roughly corresponds to the function of a
1
SIMEAS N is a measuring and recording
device which is used to monitor all charac- ■ 1 integrated thermal printer, multimeter. The selected values to be
teristics referring to the voltage quality in ■ 1 3.5" floppy disk drive, 1.44 MB for measured are continuously displayed and
three-phase systems in compliance with parameters and data storage, the whole screen content including the
the requirements stated in the EN 50160 graphic illustrations can be printed on the
■ 1 serial interface type RS 232C (V.24) for
and IEC 1000 Standards. connection to a personal computer for
integrated thermal printer by key command. 2
This operating mode is used to check cor-
configuration and data transmission.
Application rect connection of the device and is suitable
Measured and calculated quantities for general measurement tasks. Monitoring
Medium and low-voltage systems, laborato- of the network quality is effected by contin-
ries, test bays. Portable device for mobile use. ■ R.m.s. values of voltages, AC, AC+DC,
uously calculating and storing the mean val-
Functions
DC, ues of the measured quantities. In the stor- 3
■ Peak voltage values during transient age mode, the averaging interval can be
Device for network quality measurement. measurement, configured individually from one period of
The measurands and operands are continu- ■ R.m.s values of currents, AC, AC+DC, the system voltage up to several months.
ously recorded over definable intervals; in DC (depending on transducer or clamp- Two types of storage modes can be select-
case of limit violations, the values will be on probes), ed, either linear mode (stops when the
averaged. This enables the recording of all ■ Voltage dips and voltage cutoffs, memory is full) or overwrite mode (the old-
4
characteristics relevant to voltage quality. ■ Overvoltages, est data will be overwritten by the new in-
In addition, this multi-purpose device can formation).
■ System frequency,
be used for general measurement tasks in
■ Active, reactive and apparent power, With the help of the OSCOP Q program, the
the field of AC power engineering.
1- to 3 phases, measuring data can be transmitted to
Special features ■ Phase angle, a personal computer for detailed analysis. 5
Comprehensive measuring functions. A lock- ■ Harmonics of voltages and currents up
able cover protects the terminals against to the 50th order, Information for Project Planning
accidental contact. The operator access can ■ Total harmonic distortion (THD), voltages The basic version of the device is fully
be password-protected. Clamp-on probes and currents, unweighted or weighted capable of simultaneous acquisition of up to
with an error correction function facilitate inductively or capacitively, 55 measurands.
6
connection. A back-up battery stores the ■ Unbalanced voltage and current in the
measured data in case of voltage failure. three-phase system. The voltage range of 400 V +15% is suita-
The integrated battery-backed real-time clock ble for connection to 400 V three-phase sys-
will be usable until the year 2097. Connection types tems. Clamp-on probes (10, 100 and 1000
A) for current measurement are available.
Output of the measured values via inte- ■ Single phase,
The connection of a transducer is possible, 7
grated thermal printer, floppy disk or serial ■ Four-wire three-phase current. if a resistor provides a voltage drop of 1 V
interface. nominal value.
Measurands and operands,
Measuring inputs available as an option The device can also be delivered for high-
speed processing which enables simultane-
■ 4 voltage inputs, 0–460 V, ■ Direction of harmonics,
■ Flicker measurement,
ous acquisition of up to 186 different meas- 8
■ 3 of these inputs with additional transient urands.
acquisition ± 2650 Vpeak at a sampling ■ Digital storage oscilloscope.
Optional functions which can be added at a
rate of 2 MHz,
Operating modes later date by software installation:
■ 4 voltage/current inputs, voltage
0–460 V/clamp-on probe or transducer. ■ Continuous measurement with display ■ Power measurement of individual har-
at one-second intervals, monics and their direction in order to 9
■ Continuous measurement with data stor-
identify the cause.
age, ■ Extension of the device functions for use
■ Event-controlled measurement with data
as an additional three-channel digital oscil-
storage. loscope.
■ Flicker measurement according to
Storage capacity IEC 60 868.
10
Up to 500,000 measured and calculated
values; various options for defining the
measuring points.
Fig. 244: SIMEAS N Quality Recorder
Power Quality
Recording Equipment
1
The SIMEAS R Fault and Digital Recorder
Application
■ Stand-alone stationary recorder for extra-
high, high and medium-voltage systems.
2
■ Component of secondary equipment of
power stations and substations or indus-
trial plants.
Functions
3 Fault recorder, digital recorder, frequency/
power fault recorder, power quality record- Fig. 245: SIMEAS R Systems
er, event recorder. are used in power plants …
All functions can be performed simultane-
ously and are combined in one unit with no
4 need for additional devices to carry out the
different tasks.
Special features
Fig. 247: Fault record
■ The modular design enables the realiza-
tion of different variants starting from
5 systems with 8 analog and 16 binary in-
puts up to the acquisition of data from Fault detection is effected with the help of
any number of analog and binary chan- trigger functions. With analog quantities
nels. this refers to
■ Clock with time synchronization using
■ exceeding the limit values for voltage,
6 GPS or DCF77.
current and unbalanced load (positive
■ Data output via postscript printer, re- and negative phase sequence system).
mote data transmission with a modem
■ falling below the limit values for voltage,
via the telephone line, connection to Fig. 246: … and to monitor transmission lines current and unbalanced load (positive
LAN and WAN.
and negative phase sequence system).
7 ■ limit values for sudden changes in up or
Fault Recording (DFR) downward direction.
This function is used for the continuous Monitoring of the binary signals includes
monitoring of the AC voltages and cur- ■ signal status (high, low)
rents, binary signals and direct voltages or ■ status changes
8 currents with a high time resolution. If a
fault event, e.g. a short-circuit, occurs, the
specific fault will be registered including
its history. The recorded data are then ar-
chived and can either be printed directly in
the form of graphics or be transferred to a
9 diagnosis system which can, for example,
be used to identify the fault location.
10
Power Quality
Logical triggers In single-phase and three-phase systems, Sequence of Event (SOE) Recording
the following measurands are recorded:
Logical triggers can be defined by combin- Each status change occurring at the binary
ing any types of trigger event (analog or ■ R.m.s. values of voltages and currents inputs is registered with a resolution of 1
binary). They are used to avoid undesired ■ Active power, phase-segregated and 0.5 ms and is then provided with a time
recording by increasing the selectivity of overall stamp indicating the time information from
the trigger function. The device can distin- ■ Reactive power, phase-segregated and the year down to the millisecond.
guish between different causes of a fault, overall (displacement or total reactive 200 status changes per second can be
e.g. between a voltage dip caused by a power) stored for each group of 32 inputs. The 2
short-circuit (low voltage, high current) ■ Power factor, phase-segregated and mass memory of the device can be config-
which needs to be recorded, and the dis- overall ured according to requirements (a 5 MB
connection of a feeder (voltage low, cur- memory, for example, enables the storage
■ Frequency
rent low) which does not need to be re- of approx. 120,000 status changes). Mod-
corded. ■ Positive and negative sequence voltage
ules for signal voltages between 24 and
and current
250 V are available. 3
Sequential control ■ Weighted and unweighted total harmon-
ic distortion (THD) The time-synchronous output enables
An intelligent logic operation is used to the combined representation with analog
make sure that each record refers to the ■ 5 th to 50 th harmonics (depending on
the averaging time) curves, e.g. of alarm and command signals
actual duration of the fault event. This is to together with the course of relay voltages
■ DC signals, e.g. from transducers
prevent continuous violation of a limit value and currents. With the help of the OSCOP P 4
(e.g. undervoltage) from causing perma- Depending on the individual network con- program, the event signals can however
nent recording and blocking of the device. figuration, a three or four-wire connection also be displayed in the form of a text list
is used. in chronological order. The use of a sepa-
Analog measurands
rate sequence of event recorder will no
16-bit resolution for voltages and DC quan- longer be required.
tities and 2 x 16-bit resolution for AC volt-
Frequency/Power Recording (FPR) 5
ages. This function uses the same principle as a
The sampling frequency is 256 times the fault recorder. It continuously monitors the
period length, i.e. 12.8 kHz at 50 Hz and gradient of the frequency and/or power of
15.36 kHz at 60 Hz for each channel. one or more three-phase feeders. If major
A new current transformer concept ena- deviations are detected, e.g. caused by the 6
bles a measuring range between 0.5 mA outage of a power plant or when great loads
and 400 A r.m.s. with tolerances of <0.2% are applied, the profile of the measurands
at <7 Ar.m.s. and <1% at >7 Ar.m.s. Further- will be recorded including their history. The
more, direct current is registered in the recorder is also used for the registration of
range above 7 A; this enables a true image power swings.
of the transient DC component in the 7
Measurands
short-circuit current.
■ Frequency of one of the voltages,
Binary signals (limit of error ± 1 mHz)
The sampling frequency at the binary in- ■ Active power, reactive power
puts is 2 kHz. (reactive displacement power), 8
(limit of error ≤ 0.2%)
Data compression ■ Power factor
For best utilization of the memory space Averaging interval Fig. 248: SIMEAS R for 8 analog and 16 binary inputs,
and for high-speed remote transmission 1
/2 19'' design
the data can be compressed to as little as A value between 1 and 250 periods of the
2% of their original size. network frequency can be selected. 9
Fault diagnosis History
Performed with the OSCOP P software Depends on the averaging interval;
package. 10 s times the averaging periods.
Automatic power analysis

10
Digital Recording (DR)
With the help of the OSCOP software pack-
This function is used for the continuous age (see The OSCOP P) a power analysis
registration of the mean values of the of a station can be created automatically.
measurands at intervals which can be free-
ly defined (min. interval is one period). The
main function of this device is the continu-
ous recording of quantities at the feeders
and to make these values available for the
analysis of the network quality.
Power Quality
The OSCOP P Evaluation Program The individual diagrams can, of course, be Information for Project Planning
adjusted to individual requirements with with SIMEAS R
The OSCOP P software package is suitable
1 for use in personal computers provided with
the help of variable scaling and zoom func-
The secondary components of high or
tions. Records from different devices can
the operating systems MS WINDOWS 95/98 medium-voltage systems can either be
be combined in one diagram. The different
or WINDOWS NT. It is used for remote accommodated in a central relay room or
quantities measured can be immediately
transmission, evaluation and archiving (da- in the feeder dedicated low-voltage com-
calculated by marking a specific point in a
tabase system) of the data received from partments of switchgear panels. For this
diagram with the cursor (impedance, reac-
2 a SIMEAS R or OSCILLOSTORE and from
tance, active and reactive power, harmon-
reason, the SIMEAS R system has been
digital protection devices. The program designed in such a way as to allow both
ics, peak value, r.m.s. value, symmetry, etc.).
includes a parameterization function for centralized or decentralized installation.
remote configuration of SIMEAS R and Additional diagnosis modules can be used
The acquisition unit can be delivered in
OSCILLOSTORE units. to perform an automatic analysis of fault
two different widths, either 1/2 19" or 19"
events and to identify the fault location.
The program enables fully-automated data (full width). The first version is favorable
3 transmission of all recorded events from
The program also supports server/client
if measurands of only one feeder are to be
structures.
the acquisition units to one or more evalua- considered (8 analog and 16 binary signals).
tion stations via dedicated line, switched This often applies to high-voltage plants
line or a network; the received data can where each feeder is provided with an ex-
then be immediately displayed on a moni- tra relay kiosk for the secondary equipment.
4 tor and/or printed (Fig. 249). In all other cases, the full-width version of
The OSCOP P program is provided with 19" is more economical, since it enables the
a very convenient graphical evaluation pro- processing of up to 32 analog and 64 bina-
gram for the creation of a time diagram ry signals. The modular structure with a
with the curve profiles, diagrams of the variety of interface modules (DAUs) provides
r.m.s. values or vector diagrams (Fig. 252). a maximum of flexibility. The number of
5 DAUs which can be integrated in the ac-
quisition system is unlimited.
6 Load Dispatch Center Office
RMS values Spontaneous Spontaneous Containerized Configuration Evaluation

+ diagnostic print print Data Base
7
WAN
ISDN Office
X.25 LAN
Telephone
8
Station Level Decentralized Data Base
Configuration Diagnostic system

9
Evaluation DAKON Data compression
Printer Remote control, automatic mode
10
Stations
LAN
Bay Level SIMEAS R

8 analog/
16 binary inputs
Fig. 249: Example of a distributed recording system realized with SIMEAS R recorders and data central unit DAKON
Power Quality
With the help of a DAKON, several devices

can be interlinked and automatically con- Use of the interface modules
trolled. In addition, digital protection devic- 1
es of different make can be connected to
the DAKON. DAU Type Measurands Application
The voltage inputs are designed for direct
connection to low-voltage networks or to
low-voltage transformers. Current inputs VCDAU 4 AC voltages, Monitoring of voltages and currents of 2
are suitable for direct connection to current 4 AC currents, three-phase feeders or transformers including
transformers (IN = 1 or 5 A). All inputs 16 binary signals the signals from protective equipment.
comply with the relevant requirements for All recorder functions can be run simultaneously.
protection devices acc. to IEC 60 255.
The binary inputs are connected to floating
contacts. VDAU 8 AC voltages, Monitoring of busbar voltages 3
16 binary signals
Data transmission is preferably effected
via telephone network or WAN (Wide Area
Network). If more than one SIMEAS R is CDAU 8 AC currents, Monitoring of feeder and transformer currents
installed, we recommend the use of a 16 binary signals or currents at the infeeds and couplings of busbars
DAKON (data concentrator). The DAKON 4
creates connection with the OSCOP P
evaluation program, e.g. via the telephone DDAU 8 DC currents or For monitoring of quantities received from
network. Moreover, the DAKON automati- 16 binary signals measuring transducers and telecontrol units,
cally collects all information registered by 20 mA or 1 and 10 V.
the devices connected and stores these
data on a decentralized basis, e.g. in the BDAU 16 binary signals Event recording of alarm signals, disconnector 5
substation. The DAKON performs a great status signals, circuit-breaker monitoring
variety of different functions, e.g. it sup-
ports the automatic fax transmission of
the data. A database management system Fig. 251: Use of the data acquisition units
distributes the recorded data to different
stations either automatically or on special 6
command.
9
Fig. 250: Rear view of a SIMEAS R unit with terminals
for the signals and interfaces for data transmission
10
Fig. 252: OSCOP P Program, evaluation of a fault record
Compensation – Introduction Power Quality
Compensations Systems For industry, especially in the case of com-

plex manufacturing processes (such as for
1 example in the semiconductor industry)
Many consumers of electrical energy (trans- ”Premium Energy“ is an absolute necessity.
formers, engines, fluorescent lamps) may SIPCON is capable of effectively suppress-
cause a number of different problems: ing system perturbation, such as for exam-
reactive displacement power, non-linear ple harmonics. Here as well, tariff changes
loads (rectifiers, transformers), resulting in are to be expected worldwide in the fu-
2 distorted waveshapes. Harmonics are gen- ture. Investigations in Europe have shown
erated and, finally, an unbalanced load at that the increase in harmonics is imposing
the three phases leads to increased appar- a particular strain on systems. Such har-
ent power and thus to increased power monics occur through the operation of vari-
consumption. This is accompanied by high- able speed drives, of rectifiers – for exam-
er conduction losses, which require the ple in electroplating – and of induction
3 installation of lines and operating equipment furnaces or wind power plants. In private
suitable for higher capacities and at higher houses, the principal loads are single-
costs than actually necessary. The cost for phase, such as TV sets and personal com-
power rates in relation to the apparent pow- puters. With the aid of selective recording
er and distortion should also be considered. of weaknesses in the electrical system and
4 In many cases it is favorable to perform subsequent use of the SIPCON Power
compensation of the undesired components. Conditioner, it will be possible to improve
Siemens offers two different systems for system loading and to significantly rational-
the compensation of reactive power and of ize the high capital investment necessary
harmonics – SIPCON T and SIPCON DVR/ for system expansion.
DSTATCOM – both suitable for three-phase
5 LV systems up to a rated voltage of 690 V.
The latter system is available in designs Frequency of
also capable of compensating short-term voltage dips [%]
voltage dips and surges, as well as load
unbalances.
30.00
6 ■ SIPCON T
Passive systems using switched
25.00
capacitors or capacitors with permanent
wiring.
20.00
■ SIPCON DVR / DSTATCOM
7 Active systems using IGBT converters
for quick and continuous operation. 15.00 Magnitude
of voltage
The use of SIPCON can enable energy 10.00 dip [%]
suppliers worldwide to provide the end
consumer with distinctive quality of supply. 10 to 30
5.00 30 to 60
As it is now possible with this technology
8 to supply ”Premium Energy“, an energy 60 to 100
0.00 interruption 100
supplier can formulate differing tariffs for 10 ms 100 ms 500 ms 1s 3s 20 s
his product – electrical energy – so that he to 100 ms to 500 ms to 1 s to 3 s to 20 s to 60 s
will stand out from his competitors.
Duration of voltage dips
9 Fig. 253: Frequency and duration of voltage dips
10
Fig. 254: Active compensation system

(Power Conditioner DSTATCOM)
Power Quality
Passive Compensation – Power Factor Correction
Under unfavorable conditions, adherence

The SIPCON T Passive Filters to this rule may lead to a power factor
and Compensation Systems smaller than 0.9. In this case, centralized Individual correction 1
correction should be performed additionally.
All consumers based on an electromagnet- Group Correction
ic operation principle (e.g. motors, trans-
formers, fluorescent lamps with series re- A group of consumers, e.g. motors or fluo-
rescent lamps, operated by one common
actors) require a lagging reactive power.
switch, can be compensated with one sin-
2
This leads to an increase in the amount of
apparent power and consequently in current. gle capacitor (Fig. 256).
The supply of reactive power from the mains
Centralized Correction
leads to additional load applied to the oper-
ating equipment which, as a result, needs The solution for correcting the power fac-
to be configured for higher capacities than tor for a great number of small consumers M 3
actually required. The higher current is ac- with varying power consumption is a cen-
companied by an increased power loss. tralized compensation principle (Fig. 257)
However, the required reactive power can using switched capacitor modules and a Fig. 255: Individual correction
also be generated close to the consumer controller. The low losses of the capacitors
with the help of capacitors which prevent allows them to be integrated directly in the
the above mentioned disadvantages. When switchboards or distributors.
4
selecting the capacity it is general practice A programmable controller is used to mon- Group correction
to calculate with a power factor of 0.9 or itor the power factor and to switch the ca-
higher. pacitors according to the reactive-power
Compensation can be effected according to flow.
three different principles: individual correc-
The devices for group correction differ in 5
tion, group correction and centralized cor-
rection. their power and in their number of switch-
ing steps. For example, a unit with 250 kVA
Individual Correction can be switched in steps of 50 kVA.
We recommend the use of units suitable
This type of compensation is reasonable
for consumers with high capacities,
for switching between five and twelve 6
steps.
constant load and long operating times.
(Fig. 255). M M M
■ The capacitor is installed close to the op-
erating equipment. The lower current
flows already in the line from the busbar Fig. 256: Group correction 7
to the consumer.
■ The capacitor and the consumer are
turned on and off together; an additional
switch is not required. Centralized correction
When selecting the type of capacitors 8
please note that in the case of induction
motors, the reactive power supplied by the
capacitor must not exceed approx. 90% of
the motor reactive power in idle operation.
Otherwise, disconnection might cause self-
excitation by the resonance frequency, 9
since the motor and the capacitor form a
resonant circuit. This effect may lead to
high overvoltages at the terminals and af-
fect the insulation of the operating equip-
ment. As a general rule, the following val- M M M
ues should be considered for the capacitor:
10
■ Approx. 35% of the motor power
Controller
at ≥ 40 kW,
■ Approx. 40% of the motor power from
20 to 39 kW, M M M
■ Approx. 50% of the motor power
at < 20 kW.
Fig. 257: Centralized correction
Power Quality
Passive Compensation – Power Factor Control
The SIMEAS C Power Factor

1 Q1 Controller
Q2 QC The centralized correction principle is ef-
fected with the help of a controller. This
unit is designed for panel mounting (front
2 P S2 S1
frame dimensions 144 x 144 mm accord-
ing to DIN) in the door of the compensa-
tion equipment. It is connected to L1, L2
ϕ1 and L3 of the mains voltage; the current is
ϕ2 taken from a current transformer in L1 rated
1 A or 5 A.
3 All capacitor modules connected are
switched stepwise in such a way as to
enable best approximation to the setpoint
value of the power factor. Defined waiting
Fig. 258: SIMEAS C Power Factor Controller Fig. 259: Effect of compensation periods prevent excessive switching opera-
4 tions and ensure that the capacitor will be
discharged properly before the next con-
nection. Two setpoints (cos ϕ1 and cos ϕ2)
Two examples can be specified separately to enable dif-
ferent modes for day and night time.
5 Each capacitor module is operated by con-
1 Uncompensated system, rated voltage 400 V tactors which are controlled by means of
six contacts. A further contact is used for
Active power Pa 550 kW error indication. One input for a floating
Power factor cos ϕ1 0.6
Pa 550 kW contact is used to select one of the two
S1 = = = 920 kVA
Apparent power S1 920 kVA cos ϕ1 0.6 setpoints for the power factor. Apart from
6 Current I1 1330 A
the control function, the device also offers
a great amount of information on the sta-
S1 920 kVA tus of the supply system. It shows:
I1 = = = 1330 A ■ Setpoint cos ϕ1,
√3 • U √3 • 400 V
■ Setpoint cos ϕ2 (e.g. night operation),
7 ■ Line current,
2 Compensated system, rated voltage 400 V ■ Voltages,
■ Active power in kW,
Power factor cos ϕ2 0.9 ■ Apparent power in kVA,
Capacitor power QC 470 kvar QC = Pa (tan ϕ1 – tan ϕ2) ■ Actual reactive power in kvar,
8 Apparent power S2 610 kVA ■ Deviation of the reactive power from
Current I2 880 A the setpoint value,
■ Reactive power of the activated
Pa 550 kW capacitors,
S2 = = = 610 kVA
cos ϕ2 0.9 ■ Harmonics of voltage U5,
9 ■ Harmonics of voltage U7,
■ Harmonics of voltage U11,
S2 610 kVA ■ Harmonics of current U5,
I2 = = = 880 A
√3 • U √3 • 400 V ■ Harmonics of current U7,
■ Harmonics of current U11.
10 A fiber-optic interface is accessible at the
The correction of the power factor from rear of the device. On request, a cable
cos ϕ1 = 0.6 to cos ϕ2 = 0.9, results in a S1 – S2 suitable for the conversion of optical puls-
34% reduction in apparent power trans- = 0.34 es into RS 232C (V.2) signals can be sup-
mitted. Line losses can be reduced by
S1
plied. This cable enables connection to a
56%. personal computer which can be used to
I12 – I22 program the controller and to read out pa-
= 0.56 rameters, as well as the measured values.
I12
Fig. 260: Examples of power factor control
Power Quality
Passive Compensation – Power Factor Control
Selecting the Capacitor Power Correction of the Power Factor in

Networks with Harmonics Ripple control Reactor/capacitor
When defining the capacitor power for a 1
system, the active power P and the power Consumers with non-linear resistors, i.e. frequencies ratio p
factor cos ϕ1 of the system have to be with non-sinusoidal power consumption,
considered. In order to upgrade cos ϕ1 to cause a distorted voltage waveshape.
< 250 Hz 14%
cos ϕ2, the following applies to the power However, all waveshapes are made up of
QC of the capacitor: sine curves the frequencies of which are
integer multiples of the system frequency > 250 Hz ≥ 7% 2
– the harmonics. When using capacitors
for power factor correction, the capacity of
> 350 Hz ≥ 5%
QC = Pa·(tan ϕ1 – tan ϕ2) these capacitors and the inductivity of the
network (supplying transformer) form a se-
ries resonant circuit. Fig. 263: Types of compensation for different ripple
Fig. 261
The two impedances of the resonance fre- control frequencies 3
quency are the same and cancel each oth-
er out; the relatively low active resistance,
The diagram in Fig. 259 shows how the however, causes current peaks which may Only in cases with a higher capacitor pow-
apparent power S1 – caused by active possibly lead to the tripping of protection er should the power supply companies be
power Pa and reactive power Q1 – is re- devices. This may occur if the resonance consulted for an agreement on the use of
duced to the value S2 by the capacitor frequency equals or is close to the fre- audio frequency hold-offs. With frequen- 4
power QC. When taking into account that quency of a present harmonic. cies greater than 250 Hz, capacitor powers
the current is proportional to the apparent without audio frequency hold-off are ad-
power, whereby the loss caused by the This effect can be corrected by the use of missible only up to 10 kvar. If the capacitor
current increases by the power of two, the capacitor units equipped with an inductor. power exceeds this value, audio frequency
saving is remarkable. This result is possibly These inductors are designed in such a hold-offs are to be integrated. This refers
supported by a lower energy tariff to be way that the resonance frequency in com- mainly to parallel resonant circuits which 5
paid. bination with the network inductivity falls are connected to the capacitors in series
below the fifth harmonic. With all higher and which show a high impedance in their
With systems in the planning stage we can harmonics, the capacitor unit is then induc-
assume that the reactive load is caused resonance frequency.
tive which excludes the generation of reso-
mainly by induction motors. These motors nances. In networks where harmonics are clearly
operate with an average power factor of present, inductor-capacitor units should be 6
≥ 0.7. Increasing the power factor to 0.9 We recommend use of these inductor-caused for compensation in any case. The
requires a capacitor power of approx. 50% pacitor units in all cases where more than specific type of compensation equipment
of the active power. 20% of the power is caused by harmonics- is to be selected with consideration of the
generating equipment. ripple control frequency. Fig. 263 shows
In present industrial plants, the required
capacitor power can be determined on the some guide values for this procedure.
Compensation in Networks with
7
basis of the energy bill, provided the plant
is equipped with an active and reactive en- Ripple Control Compensation of Harmonics
ergy meter. Ripple control is effected by superimpos- The continuous progress in power semi-
ing the network voltage with signals of a conductor technology has resulted in an
frequency between 160 and 1350 Hz.
E r– (E a • tan ϕ2) Since the capacitor conductance is rising in
increased use of controlled rectifiers and 8
frequency converters, e.g. for variable-
QC = a linear manner in relation to the frequen- speed drives. The common and character-
t cy, these signals can be practically short- istic feature of these devices is their non-
circuited. For this reason, the influence of sinusoidal power consumption. This leads
Er = reactive energy (kvarh) the compensation measures should be to distortion of the network voltage, i.e. it
Ea = active energy (kWh)
considered and, if inadmissible, it should contains harmonics. This distortion is then 9
be corrected. VDEW (German Utility Board) forced upon other consumers connected
t = operating time in hours over has issued a recommendation on this sub-
the accounting period to the same network and will also have an
ject, where the impedance factor α has effect on higher voltage levels. This disad-
tan ϕ2= calculated from the setpoint been defined as the ratio of the network vantage may lead to operational failures
value for cos ϕ2 impedance to that of the compensation and cause a higher apparent power in the
equipment at the frequency of the ripple network. In order to keep to the limit val- 10
control signal. ues as specified in the EN 50160 standard,
Fig. 262
The practical consequence is that in net- filtering may become necessary.
works without harmonics and with ripple
If no reactive energy meters are installed,
control frequencies of less than 250 Hz,
the required data can be determined with
capacitors without inductors can be used
the help of a reactive power recorder.
to correct the power factor at a capacity of
up to 35% of the apparent transformer
power. In this case, follow-up measure-
ments can be omitted.
Power Quality
Passive Compensation – Harmonics Filter
The following example shows the harmon-

ics present in a typical three-phase, fully-
1 controlled, bridge-circuit rectifier (Fig. 264).
ν = 6 · k ± 1, k = 1, 2, 3, …
2
Fig. 266
The amplitude of the currents decreases

inversely to the increase of the order
3 number, ideally, in a linear manner in rela-
tion to the frequency:
Iν =
1
· I1
4 ν
M
Fig. 267
Fig. 264: Three-phase bridge circuit Actually, the values are often slightly high-
5 er, since the DC current is not completely
smoothed. Harmonics of the fifth, seventh,
eleventh and thirteenth order may show
amplitudes which need to be reduced;
harmonics of a higher order can usually
be neglected.
6 Primary distribution network The effect of harmonic currents on the
system can be reduced considerably by the
use of filters. This is effected by generat-
Transformer ing a series resonant circuit from a capaci-
tor and an inductor which is then adjusted
7 Drive Low-voltage exactly to the corresponding frequency for
each harmonic to be absorbed. The two
impedances cancel each other out, so that
Filter
the remaining ohmic resistance is reduced
to a negligible amount, compared to the
network impedance. The harmonic currents
8 ν =5 ν =7 ν =11… are absorbed to a large extent; the rest
remains present in the supply network.
This results in a lower voltage distortion
and a considerable increase in voltage
M quality.
9 Reactive power
Referring to the fundamental component,
the filters form a capacitive load. This sup-
Active power ports the general reactive power compen-
sation. This measure enables the corre-
sponding equipment to be designed for
lower capacities (Fig. 265).
10
Fig. 265: Correction of the power factor with the help of filters
Power Quality
Passive Compensation – Selection Guide
Help for Selection Type Series 4RF6

Siemens offers capacitors with and with- Fixed reactor-capacitor units for stationary
out reactors, suitable for single-phase and compensation in networks with a non-line- 1
three-phase systems for reactive powers ar load percentage of more than 20% re-
between 5 and 100 kvar and for nominal lated to the supply transformer apparent
voltages between 230 and 690 V. These power rating. Voltages between 400 and
capacitors are suitable for the compensa- 690 V, rating from 5 to 50 kvar. Reactor/
tion of constant reactive power. capacitor ratios: 5.67%, 7% or 14%. 2
Type Series 4RB Type Series 4RF14
MKK Power Capacitors for fixed compen- Passive, adjusted filter circuits for the ab-
sation without reactors, ratings 5 to 25 kvar. sorption of harmonics. Voltages from 400
The three-phase capacitors can be directly to 690 V, rating from 29 to 195 kvar. In the
connected at the load. Discharge resistor course of project planning, the customer 3
4RX92 are to be connected in parallel. will be requested to specify the currents of
the generated harmonics, the harmonic
Type Series 4RD content in the higher-level network and the
Fig. 269: 4RY56 Capacitor module 100 kvar, switchable
MKK power capacitors for fixed compen- short-circuit reactance at the connecting as 2 x 50 kvar module for cable connection
sation without reactors, mounted in a pro- point. 4
tective housing or on a plate. Ratings 5 to
Type Series 4RF1
100 kvar. Discharge resistors included.
Fully-equipped compensation systems with
Type Series 4RY reactor suitable for 400 to 690 V, with a
Complete small systems without reactors capacitor rating up to 800 kvar and with
for the automatic stepwise control of the additional reactors for a total rating up to 5
power factor with and without integrated 1000 kvar. The controller function is real-
audio frequency hold-off in different hous- ized by SIMEAS C.
ings and at different ratings. The units are
equipped with a BLR-CC controller suitable
for 8 switching steps. Without audio fre- Version Reactor/capacitor 6
quency hold-off, the capacity ranges from ratio Fig. 270: 4RY19 power factor correction unit in sheet-
10 to 100 kvar, with hold-off from 12 to steel wall cabinet, 50 kvar
50 kvar. The nominal voltage for both ver-
sions is 400 V, the frequency is 50 Hz. 4RF16 5.67%
Larger, fully-equipped systems without
reactors are delivered in cabinets. The 4RF17 7%
7
ratings of these systems range from 37.5
up to 500 kvar for nominal values between
230 V and 690 V and frequencies between 4RF18 8%
50 and 60 Hz. With these systems the
SIMEAS C controller for operation in six 4RF19 14% 8
switching steps is used. This controller
optimizes the switching sequence for con-
stant use of the capacitors. For voltages Fig. 268
of 400 V, systems with ratings between
75 and 300 kvar and with an integrated Type Series 4RF3
audio frequency hold-off are available. 9
Fully-equipped compensation systems with
Type Series 4RY56 reactors suitable for 400 to 525 V (and also
for other voltages on request) for ratings
Capacitor modules without reactors be- between 200 and 400 kvar. Special feature:
tween 20 and 100 kvar for installation in audio frequency blocking and simultaneous
racks of 600 or 800 mm in width. filtering of harmonics. The controller func- 10
Type Series 4RF56 tion is realized by SIMEAS C.
Reactor-capacitor modules from 5 to

100 kvar for installation in racks of 600 or
800 mm in width.
For technical data of SIPCON T Passive Filters and Com- Fig. 271: 4RF1 power factor correction unit
pensation Systems see Power Quality Catalog SR 10.6 250 kvar (5 x 50 kvar) in a cabinet 2275 x 625 mm
Power Quality
Flowcharts
The flowcharts can be used as a reference
1 when selecting the suitable compensation Percentage of
equipment with regard to the individual non-linear load in
preconditions of the specific network. the network
< 20% of Sr*)
2
No Must resonances
with the higher-
level network be
avoided?
3
Yes
Ripple control in No No Ripple control in
the network? the network?
4
Yes Yes
Audio frequency No Audio frequency No
> 250 Hz > 250 Hz? 1
5
Go to
Yes flowchart 2
Yes
U5 < 3% No
U7 < 2% 2
6 present in the
network?
Yes
Capacitors and Special audio Capacitor type Equipment for
7 compensation frequency hold- 4RB, stationary power factor
units without off on request or compensation correction,
4RY. Audio fre- compensation equipm. type type 4RF17,
quency hold-off unit with reactor 4RD. Equipment reactors (7%).
on the supply (7%). for power factor Filtering of 5th
side. correction with- harmonic up
8 out reactors, approx. 30%
type 4RY.
*) Sr is the apparent power of the upstream infeeding system (transformer)
9 Fig. 272: Flowchart 1: Power factor correction for low, non-linear load
10
Power Quality
Percentage of
No non-linear load Yes 1
in the network
≥ 20% of Sr *)
Improving the
power factor 2
Avoiding resonances
with higher level network
3
Partial filtering of self- Filtering a large amount
generated harmonics of self-generated
harmonics.
4
No Ripple control Ripple control present
present in the network? in the netwok?
Yes
No Yes No 5
Audio frequency
> 350 Hz?
Yes
No
1 Audio frequency
< 250 Hz? 6
2 Yes
Compensation 4RF34 or 4RF36 Requires special Passive, tuned

equipment for special reactor version, available filter circuit 7
power factor connected power on request. type 4RF14 re-
correction, type factor correction quired, available
4RF16, with unit, or power on request.
reactors (5.67%). factor correction
Filtering of self- unit, type 4RF19,
generated 5th with reactors
harmonic up to (14%). 8
approx. 50%.
*) Sr is the apparent power of the upstream infeeding system (transformer)
Fig. 273: Flowchart 2: Power factor correction for large non-linear load 9
10
Power Quality
Active Compensation
SIPCON-DVR/SIPCON-DSTATCOM Advantages of Active There are two systems available, the DVR
Compensation Equipment (Dynamic Voltage Restorer) and the DSTAT-
1 Active Filter and Compensation ■ No capacitance, in order to exclude the
COM (Distributed Static Compensator)
Systems which differ in their specific design and ap-
generation of undesired resonances.
plication. DSTATCOM is designed for paral-
■ Reactive power and harmonics are lel and the DVR for serial connection.
A great number of industrial processes treated independently of each other; the
compensation of harmonics has no ef- The DSTATCOM is connected to the net-
based on the supply of electrical energy work between the incoming supply line
2 require a high degree of reliability in power fect on the power factor and vice versa.
and the consumer or a group of consum-
supply, including the constancy of the volt- ■ The audio frequency ripple control levels
ers as shown in Fig. 274. The compensa-
age applied and the waveshape. A short- remain unaffected.
tion unit functions as a current source and
time voltage failure or voltage dip may cau- ■ Stepless control avoids sudden changes sink. Correction includes all network char-
se the destruction of a component presently and enables compensation at any de- acteristics related to the reactive power.
being processed in an NC machine or of a gree of accuracy.
3 whole production lot in the semiconductor,
The DSTATCOM is used to compensate
■ Most rapid reaction to load changes with load reactions on the network.
chemical or steel industry. In the automo- a minimum delay.
tive and semiconductor industries, for ex- Connection of the DVR requires some more
■ No overvoltages caused by switching effort, since the system is to be looped
ample, the cost incurred by these losses operations.
may quickly accumulate to millions of dollars. into the line (Fig. 275) in series connection.
■ The equipment protects itself against In this connection, the DVR can influence
4 In return, some production processes cau-
overload. the line current flow which enables a com-
se unacceptable perturbations in the supply
network resulting from voltage dips (rolling ■ The functions will not be affected by plete compensation of voltage dips as
mills), flickers and asymmetries (steel mills). ageing of the power capacitors. occurring, for example, in the event of
■ The user can re-configure the system at short-circuits in the network. The DVR im-
Correction is possible with the help of proves the voltage quality of the supply
any time; this greatly enhances flexibility,
active compensation systems. These sys-
5 tems are capable of absorbing harmonics
even if the specific tasks have changed. system.
and of compensating voltage dips, reactive
power, imbalance in the three-phase sys-
tem and flicker problems. Their characteris-
tic features go far beyond the capabilities Net- Load
6 of passive systems (e.g. SIPCON T) and work
offer great advantages when compared
with other applications. The function princi-
ple is based on a pulse-width modulated,
IGBT
three-phase bridge-circuit rectifier, as used Converter
for example in variable-speed drives. The
7 switching elements – IGBTs (insulated gate
bipolar transistors) – are controlled by means Intermediate-
of pulses of a certain length and phase an- circuit capacitor
gle. These pulses initiate charging and dis-
charging of a capacitor, used as an energy Fig. 274: DSTATCOM
store, at periodical intervals in order to achie-
8 ve the desired effect of influencing the cur-
rent flow direction. The control function is
performed by means of a microprocessor- Net- Load
based, programmable control unit. work
10
Fig. 275: DVR
Power Quality
Active Compensation
The DSTATCOM Compensation

Equipment Net-
The DSTATCOM is used to compensate work
Load 1
reactive power, harmonics, unbalanced
load and flickers caused by a consumer.
The current supplied from the network is
LCL filter
measured and modified by injecting correc-
tive current in such a way as to prevent
DSTATCOM
2
violation of the limit values defined for re-
active power and for specific harmonics
flowing to the supply system; flicker prob-
lems can also be reduced. The power re-
quired for this compensation is derived
from the intermediate-circuit capacitor 3
which is simultaneously re-charged with
line current. This line current is also used
to correct the network current. Apart from
the comparatively low losses, no active PWM
power flow occurs. The DSTATCOM reduc- IGBT converter
es or fully compensates perturbations on
4
the network caused by the consumer.
Intermediate-circuit capacitor 5
Fig. 277: Basic diagram of the DSTATCOM

Harmonics
Net- Reactive power Load 6
work Imbalance
Flickers Function Principle Fig. 277 shows the basic diagram of the
system. The IGBT rectifier bridge is con-
The DSTATCOM unit measures the current
nected to the network via an LCL filter.
applied to the supply side and injects a cor-
The impedance of the inductivity causes
rective current which compensates load
perturbations in the supply system or re-
the pulse-width modulated voltage to im- 7
press a current into the network and ab-
duces them to the admissible amount.
Fig. 276: Load perturbations are compensated sorb components of higher frequency.
Since no capacitors are used for correc-
With the help of capacitors, the filter effect
tion, the risk of resonances, as with pas-
will be improved. DC voltage is applied to
sive systems, can be neglected. Inductors
the intermediate-circuit capacitor which is
are not required.
adjusted according to its specific function. 8
The signals from the audio frequency rip- The current is measured on the network
ple control systems are not affected. The side with the result that the correcting
use of audio frequency hold-offs can be functions improve the network current and
omitted. reduce the load reactions on the system.
The DSTATCOM is available in two control 9
variants: control variant 1 for standard op-
eration and variant 2 for flicker mode.
10
Power Quality
Active Compensation
Application of Variant 1
This is the standard design used to fulfill
1 the tasks as described below. All functions
can be performed simultaneously; they are
carried out completely independently and
do not affect each other, as occurs when
using solutions with passive components
2 (capacitors).
DSTATCOM protects itself against overload
by limiting the current. The individual tasks
can be allocated to different priority levels.
In case of overload, the tasks with the low-
est priority will then be skipped and the de-
3 vice will use its full capacity for the other
tasks. The control functions with the high-
est priority level will be the last ones re-
maining active.
In this operating mode the DSTATCOM
4 shows excellent dynamic behavior. Within
only a few network periods, the system
will reach the setpoint value. Operating var-
iant 1 is used for:
■ Absorption of Harmonics
5 A maximum of 4 harmonics up to the
13th order, e.g. 5, 7, 11 and 13, are com-
pensated. The remaining residual current
can be adjusted. This option avoids ex- Fig. 278: Example: SIPCON DSTATCOM LV
cessive system load, since the increas-
ing effect of correction causes a decline
6 in the internal resistance for the corre- Applications of Variant 2
sponding frequency. In return, the load- Variable loads require an even quicker reac- L1
caused current will considerably increase tion than can be realized with variant 1.
and with it the losses, which might re- Three-phase Active
Therefore, variant 2 has been optimized in
sult in a system overload. Therefore, it is system load
such a way as to enable reactive power
reasonable to correct the harmonics only
7 up to the limit specified by the supplier.
compensation and load balancing within
L2
the shortest time. Possible applications of
■ Reactive Power Compensation this variant are:
Reactive power compensation, i.e. cor-
■ Reduction of flickers
rection of the power factor, is possible
for both inductive and capacitive loads. Heavy load surges as occurring, for ex-
L3
8 The continuous control principle avoids ample, in welding machines, presses or
switching peaks and deviations which during the startup of drives, may cause
might occur when switching from one voltage line drops. Fluorescent lamps Fig. 279: Steinmetz compensator
step to the next. react to these voltage drops with varia-
tions in their brightness, called flickers.
■ Correction of Unbalanced Load ■ Correction of unbalanced load conditions
The reactive components of the load
9 Loads in single and two-phase connec- current have usually a greater effect in The DSTATCOM is suitable to fully cor-
tion cause voltage imbalance in the this case. The DSTATCOM can be oper- rect unbalanced loads of the three phas-
three-phase system which may also ated in the flicker mode which provides es. Until now, this was achieved with
have negative effects on other consum- an optimized reaction within the shortest the help of stepwise controlled inductors
ers. Especially three-phase motors may time in order to reduce these voltage and capacitors, but now correction can
then be exposed to overheat. variations to a large extent. The delay be performed continuously and very
10 An active load can be symmetrized by time of the system is only 1/60 of the precisely. The quick reaction of the
means of a Steinmetz compensator. period length and control is completed DSTATCOM in the flicker mode enables
While this compensator can correct only within one network period. control within only one network period.
constant loads, the SIPCOM is capable Consumers in single or two-phase con-
of adjusting its correction dynamically to nection, such as welding devices, will
the load, even if this load is changing no longer affect symmetry.
quickly.
Power Quality
Active Compensation
Information for Project Planning

When selecting a DSTATCOM, three as-
pects should be considered: 100% use for the filtering The whole nominal current of the DSTATCOM can be 1
of harmonics used for the filtering of harmonics.
1. The nominal voltage. Reactive power compensation and load balancing can
Nominal voltages of 400 V, 525 V, 690 V also be performed.
and for medium-voltage applications up This function should be used if the device is mainly used
to 20 kV. for the filtering of harmonics
2. The supply current ISN required by the 2
DSTATCOM. Only 50% of the DSTATCOM nominal current is used
50% use for the filtering
3. The type of application. of harmonics for the filtering of harmonics.
Application can be broken down into The remaining current can be used for reactive power
three types of different tasks (Fig. 280). compensation and load balancing.
3
Flicker mode Instead of harmonics filtering, the whole nominal current
is used to perform highly dynamic reactive power
compensation and load balancing.
Compared with other control variants, the dynamic
behavior is many times better.
4
Required The required nominal current for the DSTATCOM is
nominal current calculated as the geometrical sum of the required partial
currents according to the following formula:
5
ISN = √ I12+ I52+ I72+ I112+ I132
I1 = Reactive component of
the fundamental current 6
component
I5…I13 = Current harmonics
Fig. 280: Application modes of DSTATCOM

7
SIPCON can be used for the generation of
either capacitive or inductive reactive cur- Control range
of a DSTATCOM
rent. Since the latter can usually be neglect- with permanent
ed as regards reactive power compensa- compensation
tion, the working point of the DSTATCOM 8
can be displaced by means of fixed com- Net- Load
pensation with the help of traditional com- work
pensation (SIPCON T). The power of the 2 x capacitive
DSTATCOM can thus be almost doubled.
(Fig. 281).
9
capacitive
inductive
SIPCON Permanent
DSTATCOM compensation 10
Control range
DSTATCOM
Fig. 281: Displaced control range
Power Quality
Active Compensation
The DVR Compensation Equipment

The DVR unit is used to correct interfering Net-
1 influences from the supply network on the work
Load
consumer. Short-time and even longer volt-
age dips, harmonics and unbalanced load
may cause considerable damage to sensi-
IGBT converter LCL filter
tive consumers. The DVR has been de-
2 signed for the compensation of such faults
in order to improve the quality in power
supply and to prevent production loss and
damage.
4 Voltage dips
Net- Voltage overshoots Load
work Harmonics
Imbalance
Fig. 282: Improving the quality in power supply Fig. 283: Block diagram – DVR
6
Function Principle
The DVR is used as a voltage source
which is integrated in the feeder line be-
tween the supply system and the consum-
7 er in series connection. The voltage ap-
plied to the consumer is measured and if it
deviates from the ideal values, the missing
components will be injected, so that the
consumer voltage remains constant. Apart
from the prevention of voltage dips, the
8 DVR is also used to correct overvoltages
and unsymmetries. The highly dynamic
system is capable of realizing the full com-
pensation of voltage dips within a period of
2 to 3 milliseconds.
9
10
Power Quality
Active Compensation
The signals from audio frequency ripple Information for Project Planning
control systems are not affected. An audio
In contrast to the principle of SIPCON
frequency hold-off is not required.
DSTATCOM, which corrects the reactive
1
Application power only for the parallel-connected load,
the whole load current flows through the
The DVR is basically used to improve the DVR system. Therefore, all preconditions
quality of the voltage supplied by the pow- and marginal conditions are to be consid-
er supply system. ered to enable correct configuration. Basi- 2
■ Correction of voltage variations cally, the following points should be taken
Remote short-circuits in the supply net- into account:
work occasionally result in voltage dips ■ Fault characteristics:
of different strength and of a duration of What kind of network faults are to be
only few tenths of a second. In weak corrected (single, two or three-phase)
networks it may also occur that the usu- and up to which residual voltage value
3
al voltage limits cannot be held over a and fault duration shall correction be-
long period of time or that sensitive con- come effective.
sumers require smaller tolerances than ■ Load:
offered by the power supply company.
Nominal value of the apparent power,
With the DVR, single, two and three- type of load, e.g. what types of drive, 4
phase voltage dips up to a certain inten- resistance load, etc. are to be supplied
sity can be compensated independently with the help of the DVR.
of their duration. Additional power is tak-
■ Corrective behavior:
en from the rectifier part from the net-
work, even if the voltage is too low; this What degree of accuracy is to be ob-
power is then supplied to the series served for the voltage on the load side. 5
transformer on the load side via the con- It will often be sufficient if the DVR sup-
verter. The value of the nominal power plies only part of the nominal load. To en-
of the DVR is reciprocal to the voltages sure correct project planning, a Siemens
to be corrected. Statistics show that expert should be consulted.
most of the short-time voltage dips have
a residual voltage of at least 70 to 80%.
6
The power to be generated by the DVR
must be sufficient to compensate the
missing part.
■ Compensation of unbalanced load Further information:
The DVR can be used to inject a positive www.powerquality.de 7
phase-sequence voltage which enables
the compensation of imbalance in the
supply voltage in order to avoid exces-
sive temperatures of three-phase ma-
chines.
■ Absorption of harmonics
8
The quick-action control of the DVR ena-
bles elimination of harmonics by correct-
ing distortions of the voltage waveshape.
Since the system can be configured for
different tasks, it can also be used to 9
process harmonics of the fifth, seventh,
eleventh and thirteenth order, either sep-
arately or as a whole.
10
1
10

6 Protection PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

6 Protection PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Protection and

General overview System control centers

One design for all applications

Protection and substation automation 1

Substation automation Protection Power quality

SINAUT LSA SICAM SAS Feeder protection SIMEAS R

Line protection SIMEAS Q, M, N

* Windows is a registered product of Microsoft

Substation control Switchgear interlocking Advantages for the user

It must, however, be ensured that the coils Electromagnetic compatibility

Minimum K*ALF Example: Stability-verification of the

Line differential Iscc. max. (internal fault) K*

Introduction SIPROTEC 3 SIPROTEC 4

On-line remote data exchange

Off-line dialog with numerical relays DIGSI

Relay data management

Mode of operation PC interface

Tripping check or test reclosure by local

Fig. 19: Self-monitoring system

Fig. 21: SIPROTEC 4 relays 7SJ61/62/63, implemented function

Integration of relays in the substation

DIGSI 4 the PC program for operating

Fig. 27: Range of operational measured values

CFC: Planning instead of programming

Hardware and software platform

Fig. 30: CFC logic with module library

Operation of SIPROTEC 3 Relays

Remote relay interrogation

SIPROTEC 3 Relay Series

1/1 of 19" width

SIPROTEC 4 Relay Series

Standard relay version with 5

Wire size 2.7 – 4 mm2

Special relay version (Fig. 42)

Relay Selection Guide

Pilot wire differential

7 32F Forward power – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – ■ ■ – ■

Pilot wire differential

Relay Selection Guide

* ANSI/IEEE C 37.2: IEEE Standard Electrical Power System Device

Digital overcurrent-time protection

Combined feeder protection and control

1 Line protection with

Full scheme distance protection 1

Transmission line protection

Fig. 57: 7SD502/503

Pilot wire differential protection for lines 1

Fig. 58: 7SD600 6

Differential protection for machines and

Fig. 59: 7UT512 Fig. 60: 7UT513

Fig. 61: 7SS50 Fig. 62: 7SS52

7SJ511 51 Fig. 65b: Numerical protection of a generating unit

Fig. 65a: Numerical protection of a generating unit

4 87 Differential protection ∆lG>

Autoreclose and check-synchronism relay Voltage and Frequency Relay 1

Fig. 68: 7SV600

Case 7XP20 for relays 7SJ600, 7RW600, 7SD600, 7SV600

150 231.5 146

Front view Side view Panel cutout

225 231.5 221

Case 7XP2020-2 for relay 7VH83

Case 7XP2010-2 for relay 7VH80, 7TR93

Front view Side view Back view Panel cutout 5